summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/67950-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authornfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org>2025-01-21 23:20:27 -0800
committernfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org>2025-01-21 23:20:27 -0800
commitbc86937057fb80ddf9aaacf93b3aa96148f750b5 (patch)
tree1ac74debf96b205d10e51bb95792c8d22996a496 /old/67950-0.txt
parent3c3b11d289b9818f2b0c8a46c5b3b0b1e7a63793 (diff)
NormalizeHEADmain
Diffstat (limited to 'old/67950-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/67950-0.txt8025
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8025 deletions
diff --git a/old/67950-0.txt b/old/67950-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index f792627..0000000
--- a/old/67950-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8025 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Marcus, by Walter Aimwell
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Marcus
- or, The Boy-Tamer
-
-Author: Walter Aimwell
-
-Release Date: April 29, 2022 [eBook #67950]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: Richard Hulse, Barry Abrahamsen, and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was
- produced from images generously made available by The
- Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARCUS ***
-
-
-
- New and Popular Series for Boys and Girls.
-
- ────────────────────
-
- THE AIMWELL STORIES;
-
- A SERIES OF VOLUMES, ILLUSTRATIVE OF YOUTHFUL CHARACTER,
- AND COMBINING INSTRUCTION WITH AMUSEMENT.
-
- BY WALTER AIMWELL,
-
-
- Author of “The Boy’s Own Guide,” “Boy’s Book of Morals and Manners,” &c.
-
- WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS.
-
- ───────────────
-
-The volumes contain about 300 pages, 16mo, each, bound in cloth, with
-gilt backs. Price 63 cents.
-
-☞ Each volume is complete and independent of itself, but the series will
-be connected together by a partial identity of characters, localities,
-&c.
-
-The first five volumes of this series are now ready. They are entitled:
-
- OSCAR; or, the Boy who had his own Way.
- CLINTON; or, Boy-Life in the Country.
- ELLA; or, Turning over a New Leaf.
- WHISTLER; or, the Manly Boy.
- MARCUS; or, the Boy-Tamer. (Now Ready.)
- JESSIE; or, Trying to be Somebody. (Shortly)
-
-
- NOTICES OF THE PRESS.
-
-In the department of juvenile literature, the ‘Aimwell Stories’ have
-fairly come to rival the ‘Rolla Books’ in the affections of the young
-people. The author when he conceived the plan of the series, struck a
-vein which he has since been working with rich and constantly increasing
-success.—[Boston Transcript.
-
-One of the best series for the young ever written. Every family of
-children ought to have them.—[Chicago Congregational Herald.
-
-They are written with great skill for the tastes and necessities
-of children, and they are written conscientiously, with a moral
-and Christian effort unobtrusively operative upon every
-page.—[Congregationalist.
-
-A better series of books for children were never written. The author has
-studied deeply and accurately the feelings, hopes, and thoughts of
-youth.—[Boston Mail.
-
-The author of the ‘Aimwell Stories’ has a happy knack at combining
-amusement and instruction. Under the guise of a story, he not only
-teaches a moral lesson, which is or ought to be a leading object of
-every tale for children, but he gives his readers instruction in
-philosophy, geography, and various other sciences. So happily are these
-introduced, however, that the youthful reader must learn in spite of
-himself.—[Boston Journal.
-
-It is the best series of juvenile books with which we are
-acquainted.—[Northampton Gazette.
-
-We have spoken repeatedly, and with unqualified commendation, of this
-series of juvenile volumes. It would be difficult to exaggerate their
-merits as a source of amusement and instruction to children.—[American
-Patriot.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- NATIONAL SERIES OF AMERICAN HISTORIES.
-
- =By Rev. Joseph Banvard.=
-
- ────────────────────
-
-PLYMOUTH AND THE PILGRIMS; or, Incidents of Adventures in the History of
- the First Settlers. With Illustrations. 16mo, cloth, 60 cts.
-
-When once taken up it will not be laid down without regret until
-finished.—_Courier._
-
-An exceedingly interesting volume.—_Am. Traveller._
-
-Popular reading, particularly adapted to entertain and instruct
-youth.—_Mercantile Journal._
-
-Every New Englander, wherever he resides, should own this
-book.—_Scientific Am._
-
-An extremely interesting volume, written in a plain but vigorous style,
-adapted to the young, but will be read with interest by the older
-ones.—_Ch. Freeman._
-
-Highly attractive in style and instructive in matter.—_N. Y. Com. Adv._
-
-
-NOVELTIES OF THE NEW WORLD; an Account of the Adventures and Discoveries
-of the First Explorers of North America. With numerous Illustrations.
-16mo, cloth, 60 cts.
-
-A series of books which will serve as valuable introductions and
-enticements to more extended historical reading.—_Am. Traveller._
-
-It has all the interest of a romance.—_Portland Transcript._
-
-We have seen the boys bend over these pages, unwilling to leave them,
-either for play or sleep; and when finished, inquiring anxiously _when
-the next_ would come.—_Watchman and Reflector._
-
-Neither too childish for adults, nor yet too difficult of comprehension
-for children. They will delight as well as instruct.—_Mercantile
-Journal._
-
-Interesting scenes and events in the New World are here brought together
-and invested with a charm that is irresistible by old as well as
-young.—_Ch. Intelligencer._
-
-
-ROMANCE OF AMERICAN HISTORY; or, an Account of the Settlement of North
-Carolina and Virginia, embracing the tragic Incidents connected with the
-Spanish Settlements, French Colonies, English Plantation at Jamestown,
-Captivity of Captain Smith, the Adventures of Pocahontas, etc. With
-Illustrations. 60 cents.
-
-All the interest of romance, and the addition of veritable
-history.—_Puritan Rec._
-
-It is a most pleasing and instructive book.—_Home Journal._
-
-Interesting as a novel, and a thousand times more profitable
-reading.—_Lit. Mes._
-
-Every library should be furnished with this Series of American
-Histories.—_N. E. Farmer._
-
-Admirably fitted for family reading, and calculated to interest the
-young.—_Trav._
-
-Attractive series of books founded on the early history of our country;
-it will make a most valuable addition to all family libraries.—_Arthur’s
-Gazette._
-
-No more interesting and instructive reading can be put into the hands of
-youth.—_Portland Transcript._
-
-The series will embrace the most interesting and important events which
-have occurred in the United States since the settlement of the country.
-Each volume to be complete in itself and yet, when all are published,
-they will together form a regular SERIES OF AMERICAN HISTORIES.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-[Illustration:
-
- CHRISTMAS TREE.
- (See p. 268.)
-]
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-[Illustration:
-
- The Aimwell Stories
- By
- Walter Aimwell
- Gould & Lincoln
-]
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- +The Aimwell Stories.+
-
- ────────────────────
-
-
-
-
- +MARCUS+;
-
-
- OR,
-
-
- +THE BOY-TAMER+.
-
-
-
-
- BY
-
-
- WALTER AIMWELL,
-
- AUTHOR OF “WHISTLER,” “ELLA,” “CLINTON,” “OSCAR,” ETC.
-
-
-
-
- WITH ILLUSTRATIONS.
-
-
-
-
- +BOSTON+:
- +GOULD AND LINCOLN+,
- 59 WASHINGTON STREET.
- NEW YORK: SHELDON, BLAKEMAN & CO.
- CINCINNATI: GEORGE S. BLANCHARD.
- 1858.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1857, by
-
- +GOULD AND LINCOLN,+
-
- In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the District of
- Massachusetts.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- ELECTROTYPED BY
- W. F. DRAPER, ANDOVER, MASS.
-
- PRINTED BY
- GEO. C. RAND & AVERY BOSTON
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- PREFACE.
-
- --------------
-
-
-A LEADING aim of this little volume is to point out to elder brothers
-and sisters some of the ways in which they may exert a happy influence
-upon the younger members of the family. It also attempts, incidentally,
-to set forth the idea, that the best system of government for a child is
-that which trains him to govern himself. But while the author hopes his
-pages will not be wholly unsuggestive to such parents and “children of a
-larger growth” as may honor them with a perusal, he trusts there will
-remain enough both of story and moral for his younger readers, for whom,
-after all, MARCUS and the other volumes of this series are especially
-intended.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- ADVERTISEMENT.
-
- --------------
-
- “PRECEPTS MAY LEAD, BUT EXAMPLES DRAW.”
-
- --------------
-
-
-“THE AIMWELL STORIES” are designed to portray some of the leading phases
-of juvenile character, and to point out their tendencies to future good
-and evil. This they undertake to do by describing the quiet, natural
-scenes and incidents of every-day life, in city and country, at home and
-abroad, at school and upon the play-ground, rather than by resorting to
-romantic adventures and startling effects. While their main object is to
-persuade the young to try well the foundations of their characters, to
-win them to the ways of virtue, and to incite them to good deeds and
-noble aims, the attempt is also made to mingle amusing, curious, and
-useful information with the moral lessons conveyed. It is hoped that the
-volumes will thus be made attractive and agreeable, as well as
-instructive, to the youthful reader.
-
-Each volume of the “Aimwell Stories” will be complete and independent of
-itself, although a connecting thread will run through the whole series.
-The order of the volumes, so far as completed, is as follows:—
-
-
- I. OSCAR; OR, THE BOY WHO HAD HIS OWN WAY.
- II. CLINTON; OR, BOY-LIFE IN THE COUNTRY.
- III. ELLA; ON, TURNING OVER A NEW LEAF.
- IV. WHISTLER; OR, THE MANLY BOY.
- V. MARCUS; OR, THE BOY-TAMER.
- VI. JESSIE; OR, TRYING TO BE SOMEBODY. (_In preparation._)
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CONTENTS.
-
-
- ────────
-
-
- CHAPTER I.
-
- THE PAGES.
-
- PAGE.
-
- The stage coming—A sharp pair of eyes—Rover’s 19
- greeting—The two passengers—Warm
- greetings—Oscar—Ronald’s opinion of him—His judgment
- corrected—The farm—Capt. Page’s last voyage—How the
- farm was managed—The boarders—Ronald—His early
- orphanage—A temporary home—Marcus’s proposal—Its
- success—The little savage tamed—Oscar’s bearing—His
- good purposes—Difficulties—The secret—A lesson to
- learn—Oscar’s career,
-
-
- CHAPTER II.
-
- THE NEW-COMER.
-
- The lion of the day—Oscar’s plans—A few days’ 32
- leisure—The flock of sheep—Other attractions—Willing
- idleness—The agreement in relation to Oscar—An
- inducement to industry—Oscar’s work laid out—Fair
- play enjoined—Lord of the woodshed—Volunteers—Keeping
- the pile good—Cutting hay and roots—Feeding the
- stock—Special pets—Taking care of the horses—Milking
- the cows—Sundry jobs—Studies—Play-time—Daily lessons,
-
-
- CHAPTER III.
-
- A BOY’S INFLUENCE.
-
- Kate and the boys—Indian ink prickings—Ear 43
- boring—Smartings—Exhibiting the marks—Doing as other
- boys do—The beauty of Indian ink art—A relic of
- heathenism—Why the ancients marked themselves—No
- moral guilt incurred by the boys—Soap and water of no
- avail—What Oscar said—A doubtful star—Unsuspected
- listeners—Sam Hapley—His family—The mortgage—A sad
- change—Influence of large boys—Power of example—An
- illustration—A good purpose,
-
-
- CHAPTER IV.
-
- UP THE MOUNTAIN.
-
- An abandoned project—A party for Prescott’s 55
- Peak—Anecdotes of Rover—Other knowing dogs—Ronald’s
- story—Was it a lie?—A cast-off snake’s skin—Black
- snakes—The pond—Mysterious operations—Setting the
- water afire—The experiment
- explained—Fire-damps—Steamboats engulfed in
- flames—The Mountain—Old Gooden—His adventure with a
- steel trap—How he lived—His family—The cabin—The
- spruce gum trade—A foolish habit—The top of the
- mountain—The view—A monument proposed—The stones—The
- pole—The descent—Something left behind—A generous and
- a mean spirit—Ronald’s return—Wearing veils—The
- reproof—The veil restored—Difficulties of the
- descent—The lost cap—“Tit for tat”—The cap
- reclaimed—Arrival home,
-
-
- CHAPTER V.
-
- THE BLOTTED WRITING-BOOK.
-
- A welcome announcement—Marcus as teacher—Favors 75
- solicited—Demonstrations of joy—A sudden
- change—Ronald’s explanation—The blotted
- writing-book—Punishment—Resistance and escape—An
- omitted particular—Assault and battery—How Marcus
- proposed to settle the matter—Mrs. Page’s
- misgivings—The case discussed—Nature of school
- government—An interview with the teacher—Her version
- of the affair—Ronald’s impudence—The writing-book
- examined—A discovery—The disgrace of expulsion—The
- teacher’s terms of settlement—Ronald rejects
- them—Motives urged—Unhappiness—The last resort—A
- motive that cannot be resisted—Going to
- school—Outside annoyances—The confession—The
- teacher’s response—Her confession—The unknown
- offender—Ronald subdued,
-
-
- CHAPTER VI.
-
- LETTER-WRITING.
-
- How Oscar discharged his duties—His lessons—Unanswered 92
- letters—A bad way—The day devoted to
- letter-writing—“Yes” and “No”—Why Marcus spoke of the
- subject—Wandering thoughts—A strange bird—A day
- dream—The proud conquest—A perilous descent—The prize
- secured—The dream ended—The
- newspaper—Scribbling—Apologies—The eagle becomes a
- hawk—Marcus astonished—Oscar’s excuses—A ride
- lost—Finds himself a prisoner—A light dinner—The task
- finished—A plan to encourage letter-writing—Kate’s
- achievements in that line—A domestic post office—The
- plan unfolded—A vote taken—Choosing a name—Rules
- adopted,
-
-
- CHAPTER VII.
-
- THE RAIN POWER.
-
- The letter-box—The first mail—The invitation—A storm 110
- predicted—The water boils away—The prediction
- fulfilled—Sorry mishaps—Fretfulness—Selfishness—The
- rain not needless—Quantity not excessive—A few
- calculations—Wonderful results—Annual fall of
- rain—Rainy regions—Little and often better than much
- and seldom—Object of the tropical rains—How the water
- forms clouds—Evaporation—Effects of heat—Why vapor
- rises—Visible vapors—Office of the winds—Why the rain
- falls—Snow and hail—Snow crystals—The Sahara—South
- American deserts—Poetry—Bryant’s “Rain Dream,”
-
-
- CHAPTER VIII.
-
- INSUBORDINATION.
-
- Marcus’s theory of government—How it worked with 131
- Oscar—Apprehended failure—A consultation—A forbidden
- intimacy—Tobacco—The letter—Ten arguments against
- tobacco, and one for it—An ineffectual
- remonstrance—Mrs. Page’s decision—Oscar plainly dealt
- with—His demeanor—The circus bill—The excitement
- suddenly allayed—Objections to the circus—Oscar’s
- opinion—A caution—Arrival of the circus—Oscar visits
- the grounds—Who he met there—The donkey race—Otis—A
- recognition—An unfortunate exposure—Alfred Walton—An
- offer—Oscar declines—Solicitations and motives—He is
- pressed into the tent—Late return home—Is called to
- account—Punishment—A prisoner on parole—Inviolability
- of the parole—The Turkish soldiers—Oscar’s
- promise—Repentings,
-
-
- CHAPTER IX.
-
- CORRESPONDENCE.
-
- The “Letter-writing Society”—A letter from Oscar to 151
- Marcus—An explanation—A secret trouble—A good
- purpose—Marcus to Oscar—The explanation examined—The
- blame not wholly removed—The
- secret—Self-government—The several steps—An
- illustration—How Mr. Ease is snubbed—The
- victory—Self-denial the law of life—Power of habit—A
- proposal from Otis—A criticism by Kate—The critic
- criticised—Advantage of not taking things upon
- trust—Kate convicted—An apology—Something about “the
- old maid”—One of her letters—The four dogs,
-
-
- CHAPTER X.
-
- A WOUNDED CONSCIENCE.
-
- Ellen Blake—A place wanted—A suggestion—Mrs. Page 163
- decides to take Ellen—The school prizes—Another
- blotted writing-book—Lewis Daniels—His singular
- conduct—The teacher’s suspicions—What she said to
- Lewis—His reply—Guilt betrayed—His confession—A
- singular reason for blotting his book—Another sin
- confessed—A mystery cleared up—Stings of
- conscience—Seeking peace by new sins—The teacher’s
- forgiveness—A duty to Ronald—A duty to
- God—Prayer—Lewis confesses his fault to Ronald—Anger
- checked—The penitent forgiven—The examination—Ronald
- takes two prizes,
-
-
- CHAPTER XI.
-
- INDOOR AMUSEMENTS.
-
- A disappointment—Amusements—The new 174
- play—“Conglomeration”—A queer medley of words—The
- sentences read—Rare sport—The “Hay-Mow Debating
- Society”—Questions discussed—A riddle—A puzzle—Turk
- and Christian puzzle—A prolific word of seven
- letters—Angles—Oscar’s puzzle—Half of nine—The Arabs
- and their dinner—The carpenter’s dispute—Story of
- Audley, the miser—A hard bargain—Results of
- arithmetical progression—The figure 9—Its wonderful
- properties—Multiplying by 5—Magic Squares—Other
- diversions,
-
-
- CHAPTER XII.
-
- THE NEWSPAPER.
-
- How the newspaper originated—Its name—How it was 193
- managed—The first number—Disappointed
- correspondents—A surprise number—How it was got up—A
- transcript of the third number—Lines to Ronald—An
- exercise for scholars—Nothing insignificant—I
- can’t—To correspondents—News items—Small
- beginnings—Vanity, a fable—Rover’s communication—The
- snow—A cunning fellow—Gleanings,
-
-
- CHAPTER XIII.
-
- MASTER PAGE.
-
- The new satchel—Otis homesick—Ronald’s impatience—The 201
- academy commences—Incidents of the first day—Oscar a
- monitor—Why Otis and Ronald were not seated
- together—Lewis Daniels—The boy who didn’t care for
- Marcus—Ronald’s nickname—Jessie Hapley—Why she went
- to the academy—“Trying to be somebody”—Abby
- Leonard—Eating chalk and drinking vinegar—Mr. Upton’s
- sickness—Marcus principal _pro tem._—An alarming
- proposal—He accedes to it—His experience as
- principal—The troublesome boys—Marcus re-seats
- them—The snow image—Charlie Wilder—A statue in
- snow—What is required to make a statue—Drawing—A
- specimen by Charlie—His wish gratified—An anonymous
- note—Interdicted keys—Oscar at fault—The
- rebuke—Ronald’s mischievousness—Snapping nut
- shells—His punishment—His seat changed—An increase of
- lessons proposed—Required for his mental discipline,
- and to keep him out of mischief—Otis in school—A hard
- sum—What Marcus told Georgiana—Why the same direction
- would not answer for Otis—The difference in
- scholars—The stimulus of shame successfully applied
-
-
- CHAPTER XIV.
-
- THE TROUBLESOME SCHOLAR.
-
- Harrison Clark—A threat—His career—Assault upon his 222
- teacher—Trial and sentence—One good trait—Harrison’s
- mother—His conduct towards Marcus—Kindness
- repelled—Coughing—Objections to it—Can be
- controlled—Harrison’s impertinence—Bears in
- town—Preparations for a hunt—Warlike
- appearances—Going off at recess—Requests
- denied—Harrison’s flight—Ineffectual attempt to bring
- him back—The hunting party—Turkey Hill—Forming a
- ring—Testing the connection—The advance—Closing up
- the circle—Reports of muskets—The two bears—Dragging
- the trophies home—How they were disposed of—Harrison
- at school again—His coolness—Detained after
- school—How he enjoyed the hunt—Frankness—Marcus
- mildly points out Harrison’s misconduct—Two ways of
- meeting the evil—Severity and kindness—Failure of
- both—Candid admissions—Expulsion—Its evils—A talk
- about Harrison’s mother—A frank warning—The
- question—Subdued bearing—Harrison’s
- decision—Confession of his fault—His sincerity
- severely tested—The offence forgiven—The boy saved,
-
-
- CHAPTER XV.
-
- SAM HAPLEY.
-
- A neglected farm—Out of fuel—Going to the woods—The 242
- pipe and jug—Parting admonitions—A scene in the
- woods—Going home—Effects of the cider—Green wood and
- the rheumatism—The cows and their dinner—Benny
- absent—Sam’s assault upon him—His father’s
- anger—Origin of the trouble—A scuffle between Sam and
- his father—Sam bound and flogged—The
- outcry—Interference—Marcus intercedes—A rude
- repulse—Sam released—Marcus expostulates—He is
- silenced—Sam’s disappearance—Absent for a week—His
- return—His arrest—Searching for stolen property—It is
- found—A sad shock to Jessie—Her self-control—Growing
- recklessness of Mr. Hapley—A visit to Sam—His
- confession—His flight—Adventures on the road—Mack,
- the thief—Housebreaking—The alarm—Sam’s escape—Mack
- caught—How Sam was tracked—Preparations for the
- trial—What the judge thought of the case—The
- sentence,
-
-
- CHAPTER XVI.
-
- MERRY DAYS AND SAD ONES.
-
- A merry Christmas—Who got the start?—Presents for 263
- Oscar—Letters—Loss of the brig “Susan”—Jerry
- missing—The Christmas festival—Declamations and
- dialogues—Tableaux and music—The Christmas tree—Its
- fruit—Santa Claus—His speech—Gathering the
- fruit—Refreshments—New Year’s morning—Sad news from
- Benny Hapley—Marcus his Sabbath school teacher—His
- interest in Benny—His sadness—A pleasant surprise—A
- present from Harrison—His gratitude—A visit to
- Benny—His prediction—Anticipations of heaven—Mr.
- Hapley’s agony—His promise to Benny—Benny’s
- coldness—Growing dark—A mysterious light—Parting
- kisses—One for Sam—The spirit takes its
- flight—Effects of the scene upon Marcus—His new
- purposes,
-
-
- CHAPTER XVII.
-
- ADVERSITY.
-
- Mr. Hapley signs the pledge—Empties his liquors—A 280
- desperate struggle—Opinions of the neighbors—Mr.
- Todd’s prediction—How it was treated—What Mr. Todd
- was supposed to be after—Uncharitableness—Difficulty
- of acquiring self-government in mature life—Mazeppa
- and the wild horse—Mr. Hapley’s relapse—Loss of
- self-confidence and self-respect—A visit to the
- rum-shop—His prolonged absence—A terrible snow
- storm—Henry despatched for Marcus—Marcus goes in
- search of Mr. Hapley—The search abandoned—Morning—The
- frozen horse and rider—The snow
- grave—Poverty—Jessie’s trials—The administrator’s
- advice—Jessie’s plans—Her self-sacrificing
- spirit—Words of comfort—Henry’s brave words—He finds
- a new home—Jessie provided for—Mrs. Hapley returns to
- her father’s,
-
-
- CHAPTER XVIII.
-
- THE DIALOGUE.
-
- Rivalry among the academy students—The motto on the 294
- blackboard—Praiseworthy motives—The student’s true
- motive—Ronald’s request—The plan for a dialogue—How
- Marcus proposed to help Ronald—The work
- completed—Dialogue of “Head and Foot”—Speech of John
- Head—A severe examination—How the boys were put
- through their paces—One pace not exhibited—An
- explosion—What is Congressional usage—The
- prizes—Their unequal distribution—How the boys
- proposed to equalize matters—John’s prize
- volume—Master Foot called up—The complimentary
- address—The presentation—Dinner-pot
- suggestions—Curious resemblances—Foot doubts his
- claim to the testimonial—A bet—Head smells a rat, but
- concludes not to back out—The cabbage fastened upon
- him—The wager won—Master Foot’s generosity—Master
- Head’s magnanimous response—The treat—View of the
- testimonial,
-
-
- CHAPTER XIX.
-
- CLOSE OF THE TERM.
-
- Oscar’s disappointment—No letter from home—An agreeable 308
- surprise—A successful examination—The exhibition—The
- prizes—The surprise party—Presentation to Mr.
- Upton—The “Academy Offering”—Its history—Mr. Upton’s
- acceptance of the gift—Another surprise—The
- writing-desk—Harrison’s address to Marcus—The reply—A
- secret well kept—Gratitude of Oscar’s parents—The
- inscription in Oscar’s prize volume,
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- Illustrations.
-
-
- ────────
-
-
- THE CHRISTMAS TREE, FRONTISPIECE.
- VIGNETTE, TITLE PAGE.
- THE SHEEP, 34
- AN ORNAMENTED FACE, 47
- THE BLACK SNAKE, 59
- THE MOUNTAIN CABIN, 65
- THE EAGLE’S NEST, 98
- SNOW CRYSTALS, 125
- DONKEY RACE, 141
- MAKING FOUR DOGS OUT OF TWO, 162
- ANGLES, 182
- THE GARDEN PUZZLE (two Figures), 183
- RONALD’S SATCHEL, 201
- THE STAG AND DOG, 214
- MR. HAPLEY AND HIS FRIEND, 244
- THE BURGLARS, 258
- MAZEPPA ON THE WILD HORSE, 283
- THE TESTIMONIAL, 307
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- =+MARCUS+.=
-
-
-
-
- ---------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER I.
-
- THE PAGES.
-
-
-“THERE’S the stage, mother! It’s coming round the Bend,—don’t you hear
-it? Hark! how near it sounds! I shall see it in a minute. There it is,
-now! And there’s somebody on the top with Mr. Peters;—yes, there are two
-or three persons. I’ll bet Marcus and Oscar are there; don’t you believe
-they are? I’d ride outside, if I were they; wouldn’t you, mother?”
-
-“You had better not be too jubilant, Ronald,” calmly replied the lady
-addressed. “Have you forgotten how disappointed you were last night?”
-
-“O, well, it isn’t likely they will disappoint us again,” replied the
-boy. “I _know_ they will come, this time, just as well as I want to.
-See! that’s Marcus himself—I know him by his straw hat, and his brown
-linen sack that he wore to keep the dust off his clothes. And that boy
-by the side of him is Cousin Oscar, isn’t it? Look! isn’t that Oscar,
-Aunt Fanny?”
-
-Aunt Fanny looked towards the stage-coach, still nearly a quarter of a
-mile distant; but her eyes were not sharp enough to distinguish the
-countenance of any one upon it, and she could not relieve the impatient
-boy from his suspense.
-
-“I wonder what he looks like, any way,” resumed Ronald. “I can tell,
-just as soon as I see him, whether I shall like him or not. Why, I
-should think he was as big as Sam Hapley. He looks a little like him,
-too, from here, doesn’t he, mother?”
-
-“I can’t tell; he is hardly within the range of my vision, yet,” replied
-Mrs. Page.
-
-“Now Marcus is pointing this way,” continued Ronald. “I’ll bet he sees
-me, and is telling Oscar who I am. Why, mother, can’t you see them now?
-I can almost hear them talk.”
-
-“Yes, that is Marcus, and there is Oscar, too,” said Aunt Fanny, after
-gazing a few moments at the approaching coach.
-
-“Didn’t I tell you so!” exclaimed Ronald, rubbing his hands with glee,
-and dancing on the green sward around the door. “Speak to them, Rover!”
-he added, calling to a handsome spaniel that lay in the middle of the
-road, beneath the shade of a tree.
-
-The dog sprang to meet the stage-coach, which was now within a few rods
-of the house; and, recognizing his master, he frisked around the horses,
-and manifested his satisfaction by a variety of significant signs.
-
-Mr. Peters, the driver, reined up his horses at the farm house, and a
-young man, about eighteen years of age, jumped off, followed by a lad
-some three years younger. The first of these was Marcus Page, and this
-was his home, from which he had been absent about ten days, on a visit
-to Boston, and other places in Massachusetts. The other passenger was
-his cousin, Oscar Prestor, whose parents resided in Boston, but who had
-come to live with the family for a season. He appeared a little
-embarrassed, as he extended his hand to his two aunts, Mrs. Page, and
-her maiden sister, Miss Lee; but the cordial welcome which they extended
-to him, instantly put him at his ease. Meanwhile, little Ronald was
-gazing earnestly at the new-comer, evidently settling in his mind the
-important question which was to be decided at first sight, when Marcus
-said—
-
-“Here, Oscar, let me make you acquainted with Master Ronald, my
-_protégé_. Ronald, this is Cousin Oscar. You will soon be good friends,
-if I am not greatly mistaken.”
-
-The boys shook hands, and then Ronald, proffering his services, helped
-Oscar to carry his trunk into the house. By the time the travellers had
-removed the dust from their persons and clothing, supper was ready, and
-the family sat down to the table. Much of the conversation, during the
-meal, was addressed to Oscar, and many inquiries were made concerning
-his parents, sisters, and brothers. He sustained his part with the ease
-and freedom of one who is accustomed to society, his first shyness
-having quite disappeared. Ronald watched him with much interest, and
-seemed still in doubt whether to like him or not. After tea, when Oscar
-had gone out with Marcus to the barn, Miss Lee, remembering Ronald’s
-remark, inquired—
-
-“Well, Ronald, what do you think of Oscar?”
-
-“I think he feels pretty smart; and I never saw a city chap but what
-did,” replied Ronald.
-
-“Why, what makes you think so?” inquired Miss Lee.
-
-“I don’t know—I can’t tell,” said the boy, hesitatingly.
-
-“But if you do really think so, you ought to be able to give a reason
-for it,” added Miss Lee.
-
-“Well,” continued Ronald, “I suppose it’s because he speaks up so smart,
-and eats so genteelly, and wears such nice clothes, and—and is so
-good-looking,” he added, laughing at the idea.
-
-“I think you are mistaken in him,” replied Miss Lee. “His dress is such
-as boys in the city, of his age and class, usually wear; and his manners
-are those of a boy who is familiar with good society. Perhaps he is a
-trifle too forward, for one of his age,—I think a little bashfulness
-becomes a boy, sometimes; but I never saw anything like pride in him. He
-has been about the world a good deal, for one so young, and that, I
-suppose, has worn off his bashfulness.”
-
-“Then I guess I shall like him, if he isn’t proud,” said Ronald, and
-away he ran, to join Marcus and Oscar, who were taking a general survey
-of the farm.
-
-Mrs. Page’s farm is situated in one of the pleasant mountain towns in
-Vermont, which, if it does not bear the name of Highburg on the map,
-will not, we trust, resent the act, if we venture to give it that
-designation, in this volume. It is located at the foot and on the sides
-of the Green Mountains, and within sight of one of their highest peaks,
-the Camel’s Hump. Mr. Page was a sea captain, who, thinking it more
-pleasant to plough the land than the wave, purchased this farm in his
-native State, intending to make it his residence. When the new house and
-barns were completed, and the farm stocked with herds and flocks, and
-everything ready for occupancy, Capt. Page found that his money was all
-spent. Not having confidence enough in his agricultural skill to enter
-upon his new sphere of life without something in hand for an emergency,
-he determined to make one more voyage before he abandoned the sea. So he
-engaged a man to manage the farm during his absence, and, removing Mrs.
-Page and Marcus to their new home, he sailed on a whaling cruise,
-expecting to be gone about three years. It proved his last voyage in a
-sadder sense than he intended, for he never returned from it. Three,
-five, ten years passed away, but the missing ship was never heard from,
-and the owner of the farm never came back to enjoy the pleasant home he
-had prepared for himself. Mr. Burr, whom Capt. Page employed to oversee
-the farm, had managed its out-door affairs during all this period,
-although Marcus, within a few years, had taken a good share of the
-burden upon himself. During the winter months, indeed, Marcus now
-undertook the whole management of the farm. At this time the stock
-consisted of two horses, six or eight head of cattle, about seventy-five
-sheep, and a quantity of poultry.
-
-When Oscar returned to the house, he found a boy and girl seated at the
-supper table, who were introduced to them as Katharine and Otis
-Sedgwick. They were brother and sister, and were pupils of the village
-academy, a mile or more distant. Katharine was about fourteen years old,
-and Otis some two years younger. They boarded at Mrs. Page’s, and, with
-the persons already named, constituted the entire family.
-
-Ronald, who called Mrs. Page mother, was a boy about twelve years old,
-whom she had undertaken to bring up. His parents were French Canadians,
-who had emigrated to the vicinity of Highburg, where they both died
-within a short time, leaving the poor child without friends or money. He
-was then about eight years old. Some of the kind people of the town
-wished to prevent his becoming a pauper, and tried to find a home for
-him; but, although he was a bright and interesting child, he could not
-speak English very plain, and was, moreover, very strange and wild in
-his manners and appearance, so that no one was willing to take him.
-Pitying his friendless lot, Mrs. Page at length offered to keep him a
-few weeks, till other arrangements could be made in his behalf. A month
-sped by, and no door opened for the little orphan but that of the
-poor-house. Wild, ignorant, unused to restraints, full of mischief,
-incapable of speaking or understanding the language of the family, and,
-in fact, almost as uncivilized as an Indian child, Mrs. Page found the
-new care a burden too great, and concluded that she must give up her
-charge to the town authorities.
-
-When Marcus heard of this decision, he felt very badly. There was
-something about the little stranger, and his pitiable condition, that
-won upon his heart. So he put in a plea with his mother and Aunt Fanny
-in his behalf, and by way of further inducement, volunteered his own
-assistance in educating and training the child! Such an offer, from a
-boy who had but just passed his fourteenth birth-day, might provoke a
-smile from some people, and very properly, too. But neither Mrs. Page
-nor her sister thought of laughing at the suggestion. Marcus was not
-only a good scholar and a good boy, but he was more manly and mature,
-both in mind and body, than many youth of his age. As Ronald was more
-than six years his junior, it seemed plausible that Marcus might assist
-very much in making a man of him, and thus relieve his mother of a
-portion of the care. It was decided to try the experiment, and the
-result was so successful, that Mr. Upton, the principal of the academy,
-gave Marcus the title of “The Boy-Tamer.” The boys soon became greatly
-attached to each other, and Marcus, by his example, influence and
-teachings, assisted very much in reclaiming the little savage. After a
-year or two, he was able to take upon himself almost the entire
-management of Ronald, directing his studies, imposing upon him his daily
-tasks about the farm, and generally exercising over him the authority
-and discipline of a father. Ronald, indeed, used sometimes to speak of
-him sportively as his “adopted father,” and no doubt he seemed somewhat
-like a parent to the fatherless boy. His name, originally, was Ronald
-Doucette; but his new friends had given him their own name of Page,
-retaining Doucette as a middle name.
-
-“How do you think Oscar appears, mother?” inquired Marcus, as soon as
-the withdrawal of the young folks to their bed-rooms left him alone with
-his mother and aunt.
-
-“Very well,” replied Mrs. Page. “He is a boy that can make a good
-appearance, if he chooses to. How does he seem pleased with his new
-home?”
-
-“He doesn’t say much about it,” replied Marcus. “But he said, before we
-left Boston, that he was determined to be contented, whether or no. He
-is glad enough to come here, and I think he means to behave well. I told
-him this was probably his last chance, and that if he did not do well
-here, he would have to go back to the Reform School, and serve his full
-sentence out. But I don’t think we shall have much trouble with him. He
-has behaved well in the institution, and he says he is determined to
-reform.”
-
-“And yet I am afraid he will find more difficulties in the way than he
-imagines,” interposed Mrs. Page.
-
-“But the difficulties here are nothing to what they would be in the
-city,” added Marcus. “Nobody need know anything about his past life,
-here, and besides, he will be out of the way of his old associates and
-temptations.”
-
-“I think we ought to be very careful,” said Aunt Fanny, “never to say
-anything about his past bad conduct, even to him. Nothing would
-discourage him so much as to have it known here that he had been a bad
-boy.”
-
-“I told him,” replied Marcus, “that nobody here but we three knew
-anything about that,—not even Ronald; and I promised that it should be
-kept a secret, so long as he behaved well. He seemed very glad to hear
-it.”
-
-“He certainly has a favorable opportunity to make a new start in life,
-and I hope he will improve it,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-“We shall have to take a little time to study his character, before we
-can tell exactly how to manage him,” continued Marcus. “I found out
-everything I could about him from his mother, and I think I begin to
-understand his disposition. The great lesson he has got to learn, is, to
-govern himself. Now that he has found, by experience, that if he does
-not put himself under restraint, others will do it for him, I think he
-is in a good state to learn this lesson.”
-
-The subject of these remarks was at this time between fifteen and
-sixteen years of age. He had been a headstrong, wayward boy, and had
-given his parents much pain. At one time, they sent him to live with an
-uncle in the village of Brookdale, in Maine, for the purpose of getting
-him away from his evil associates; but while there, he set fire to a
-large quantity of cut wood, which was destroyed, and was in consequence
-sent to jail, from which he was released only on his father’s promise to
-remove him from the State. He was then sent on a short voyage to sea,
-but came back worse than before. His next downward step was to join a
-band of juvenile thieves; but his course was shortly afterward checked
-by his arrest, trial, and sentence to the Reform School during his
-minority,—that is, until he should be twenty-one years old. After he had
-remained in this institution about four months, his conduct having been
-good, and Mrs. Page, at the solicitation of Marcus, having offered to
-receive him into her family and endeavor to reform him, he was released
-by the officers, and given over to the care of his aunt and cousin; and
-his appearance in Highburg, at this time, was in accordance with this
-arrangement.[1]
-
-Footnote 1:
-
- The character and career of Oscar are more fully set forth in the
- first two volumes of this series, namely, “Oscar,” and “Clinton.”
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER II.
-
- THE NEW-COMER.
-
-
-THE new-comer, Oscar, was very naturally the recipient of much
-attention, for a few days after his arrival. The advent of such a big
-boy in the family was an event of no trifling importance, in the eyes of
-the younger members of the household. Was he not a real Boston boy, and
-had he not seen so much of city life that, in his own language, he was
-sick of it? Had he not also resided for months together in two or three
-other towns, far away from his home? And, most strange of all, had he
-not actually made a voyage to the West Indies, in the capacity of
-sailor-boy? So, at least, it was currently reported, and so they all
-believed; and surely a boy who had seen so much of the world must be
-something of a hero, they reasoned. Meanwhile, the older members of the
-family were quietly watching their new charge, studying his disposition,
-gaining insight into the secret springs of his character, and taking the
-measure of his mental acquirements and capacities.
-
-Oscar was expecting to attend the academy, during the coming winter; but
-as it was now well advanced in the autumn term, he was to study at home
-until the new term commenced, about two months from this time, it being
-now the latter part of September. Marcus had graduated at this academy,
-a year previous, and had been invited to serve as assistant teacher, the
-coming winter.
-
-“What shall _I_ do?” inquired Oscar, the morning after his arrival, as
-he perceived that all the family were busily at work.
-
-“You need not do anything, just yet,” replied his aunt. “You can look on
-and see us work, through the rest of this week, or amuse yourself in any
-way you please. By next Monday we will find something for you to do, and
-you can commence your studies, too, at the same time.”
-
-[Illustration]
-
-The few days of leisure thus granted to Oscar did not hang very heavily
-upon his hands. He found many things to interest and amuse him, about
-the farm. The greatest novelty to him, however, were the sheep, for he
-had never before lived where these pretty creatures formed a part of the
-farm stock. The pasture where they were kept became at once an
-attractive place, and it must be confessed that the groups of sheep and
-lambs, quietly nibbling the grass, or reclining at their ease in the
-beams of the morning sun, formed as beautiful a scene as could be found
-upon the farm. The cattle, horses, pigs and poultry, the capacious
-barns, with the deep and lofty hay-mows, the dairy, granary, tool-house
-and wood-house,—these, also, though more familiar objects to Oscar, were
-not without their attractions for him; while he found a still further
-source of amusement in accompanying Marcus and Ronald, as they went
-about their daily duties on the farm.
-
-Marcus was a little sorry to notice that Oscar did not appear to find
-idleness very irksome, nor to feel much anxiety about making himself
-useful. He seemed to think he had received a full discharge from labor
-for the rest of the week, and gave himself no more concern about it than
-though he was merely a boarder, like Katie and Otis, with whom he spent
-a good portion of his time. There were many little things in which his
-assistance, cheerfully offered, would have been accepted with pleasure;
-but we are sorry to say that these evidences of a “willing mind” were
-entirely wanting.
-
-And yet Oscar went to Highburg with the determination of breaking up his
-old habits of idleness, and the terms upon which he was received into
-the family, had been arranged with this end in view. He was to remain
-here not less than two years. His father insisted upon paying for his
-board, clothing and schooling, during his residence here; but as one
-great object of the plan was to teach him to be industrious and useful,
-it was stipulated that he should do his share of the work on the farm,
-at all seasons of the year. It was further agreed that a fair sum should
-be allowed him for his services, to be paid to his father at the end of
-each year. If Oscar’s conduct was satisfactory, this amount was to be
-paid over to him, when he reached the age of twenty-one. He thus had a
-real inducement to labor, in addition to the earnest entreaties of his
-parents; and lest both of these motives should prove insufficient,
-Marcus and his mother were authorized, as a last resort, to _enforce_
-the fulfilment of Oscar’s part of the contract, by any means they saw
-fit to employ. His parents well knew that he could not be effectually
-reformed, until he had acquired habits of industry.
-
-Nothing more was said to Oscar about work, until Saturday afternoon,
-when Marcus, finding the boys engaged in pitching jack-knives on the
-barn floor, accosted his cousin as follows:
-
-“I suppose, Oscar, that you begin to feel as though you would like
-something to do?”
-
-“Why, yes, I am almost tired of doing nothing,” replied Oscar, shutting
-up his knife, and putting it in his pocket.
-
-“Well, I can tell you something about your work and studies, now, if you
-wish,” continued Marcus. “A good deal of your work, for awhile, will
-consist of odd jobs, which I cannot tell you about until they come
-along. For the present you must be ready for anything, in an emergency;
-we will be able, by and by, to systematize the work a little better, so
-that you needn’t rob Ronald or me of our shares.”
-
-“No danger of that, I guess!” said Oscar, with a laugh.
-
-“I don’t know about that,” continued Marcus. “We don’t have a very great
-amount of out-door work in the fall and winter, and with three pairs of
-hands to divide it amongst, I’m afraid we may not all get our share, if
-we don’t have an understanding about it. There’s one department,
-however, that you shall have the sole charge of. Come this way.”
-
-He led the way to the wood-house, followed by the boys, and added:—
-
-“There, Oscar, you shall be lord of the woodshed; and if any body
-meddles with the saw, axe, chips, or wood-pile, without your leave, just
-let me know it. Only you must understand that if I should want to chop a
-stick occasionally, by way of exercise, I shall have the liberty to do
-it.”
-
-“Oh yes, I’ll agree to that,” replied Oscar.
-
-“And I too—I like to split wood once in a while,” interposed Otis.
-
-“And so do I,” added Ronald.
-
-“No, no, boys, you are not to touch anything here without Oscar’s
-leave,” said Marcus. “He is to be captain here, so you had better stand
-round. You see, Oscar, there is a large pile ready for use, now. My rule
-is, to saw and split a little more every week than we use, so as to have
-a good supply ahead, when cold weather sets in. I think you had better
-keep on in the same way, and make it a business, every day, or at least
-every other day, to add a little to the pile. It will also be a part of
-your work to see that a supply of wood is carried into the house every
-day.”
-
-“I’ll help carry the wood in,” said Ronald.
-
-“But I told you not to interfere with his business,” replied Marcus.
-
-“Well, if he doesn’t like it, then I wont do it,” rejoined Ronald,
-laughing.
-
-“As to the other work,” resumed Marcus, “I shall want you to help cut up
-the hay, for one thing.”
-
-“I know how to do that,” said Oscar.
-
-“There will be a good deal of hay to cut, by and by, when the horses,
-cattle and sheep are all put up in the barn. And roots, too—we shall
-soon begin to feed them out, and they will have to be cut.”
-
-“I know how to do that, too,” added Oscar.
-
-“You can help about feeding the animals, too. I think I shall let you
-have the whole care of the pigs, to begin with, after a day or two. You
-will find them very interesting pets—especially the old sow!” he added,
-with a laugh.
-
-“I might feed the horses,” suggested Oscar, whose fancy for hogs was not
-very largely developed.
-
-“So you can, and I want you to learn to bed them, and clean them out,
-and rub them down, too.”
-
-“I know how to do all that—I used to do it down to Brookdale, very
-often,” replied Oscar.
-
-“And I should like to have you help about milking; do you understand
-that?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“I know a little about it, but I never liked it very well,” replied
-Oscar, with some hesitation.
-
-“O, well, I dare say you will like it better after you get used to it,”
-said Marcus. “But if you shouldn’t, it wont make much difference. We all
-have to do some jobs that are not so pleasant as others.”
-
-“I _like_ to milk—only it tires my wrists,” said Ronald. “I can milk one
-cow, all alone, but Marcus wont let me, very often.”
-
-“Next week,” continued Marcus, “we must gather our apples, and you can
-help us about that. Then there will be the carrots, beets, turnips and
-cabbages to get in, the seed-corn to harvest, corn to husk, snow to
-shovel, wood to haul, and various other jobs to do, through the winter.
-Do you think you can do your share of all this?”
-
-“I’ll try to,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Then there are your studies to be attended to,” resumed Marcus. “I
-shall make out a list of them, for each day in the week, while you study
-at home. And you must have some time for play, in addition to all the
-rest, for ‘all work and no play makes Jack a dull boy.’ The first thing,
-every day, will be to attend to your regular morning’s work. Then, if
-there are any errands or extra jobs to be done, they will come next in
-order. After that, you will get your lessons, and then will come the
-play-time.”
-
-“How much time will he have for play?” inquired Otis.
-
-“That will depend very much upon his diligence in doing his work and
-getting his lessons,” replied Marcus.
-
-“I shan’t want much play-time,” said Oscar, with a significant glance
-towards the couple of twelve-year-old urchins, who were evidently
-counting upon his companionship in their sports.
-
-“So much the better,” replied Marcus with perfect indifference,
-although, in his mind, he had some doubts about the last assertion.
-
-Marcus had previously examined Oscar in his studies, and, in the course
-of the afternoon, he gave him lessons for the coming Monday, and also
-handed him a written list of studies for each day in the week. The list
-is as follows:—
-
-
- ORDER OF STUDIES FOR OSCAR PRESTON.
-
- ON MONDAY.
-
- Writing,
- Grammar,
- Arithmetic.
-
-
- ON TUESDAY.
-
- Grammar,
- Geography,
- Arithmetic.
-
-
- ON WEDNESDAY.
-
- Writing,
- Grammar.
-
-
- ON THURSDAY.
-
- Writing,
- Geography,
- Grammar.
-
-
- ON FRIDAY.
-
- Geography,
- Arithmetic,
- Writing.
-
-
- ON SATURDAY.
-
- Arithmetic,
- Composition.
-
- Reading, Spelling and Defining, daily.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER III.
-
- A BOY’S INFLUENCE.
-
-
-“YOU silly boys! what are you doing?” exclaimed Kate, one afternoon, as
-she found her brother and Ronald seated on a log behind the barn, busily
-engaged in pricking Indian ink into their hands, with needles.
-
-“You go away; we don’t want you here,” replied Otis, with rudeness,
-still pricking away with his needle, while the red and blue—the blood
-and ink—mingled and covered the spot upon which he was at work.
-
-“There! it hurts, I know it does,” said Kate, as her brother contracted
-his brows, and drew in his breath. “What ninnies you are to torture
-yourselves in that way, just for the sake of having some nasty ink
-pricked into your skin, where you never can get it out again!”
-
-“I don’t believe it hurts any more than having your ears bored; do you,
-Otis?” observed Ronald, remembering that Kate had lately submitted to
-the last-named operation.
-
-“No; and ’tisn’t any more foolish, either,” replied Otis.
-
-“Why, how absurd!” exclaimed Kate. “Ladies have to get their ears bored,
-to wear ear-rings, and besides, it doesn’t hurt hardly any to bore them.
-I’m sure there’s no comparison between the two things.”
-
-She did not stop to hear what answer might be made to this remark, and
-perhaps it was well that she did not.
-
-“It _does_ hurt, though!” exclaimed Otis, as soon as his sister was out
-of hearing. “O, doesn’t it smart! Come, let’s stop, now, and finish it
-some other time.”
-
-“No, I’ve got mine almost done, and I’m going to finish it now,” replied
-Ronald, who was possessed of more endurance than his comrade.
-
-Ronald persevered, and in a few minutes, wiping off the blood and ink, a
-rude resemblance to a star appeared in the red, inflamed flesh, between
-his thumb and forefinger. He seemed quite proud of the achievement, and
-going into the house, and extending his hand to Miss Lee, he accosted
-her with—
-
-“See there, Aunt Fanny!”
-
-“And see that, too!” said Otis, exhibiting his mark. “Mine isn’t done
-yet, you see. It was so sore I had to stop, but I’m going to finish it
-some other time.”
-
-“What put it into your heads to do that?” inquired Miss Lee.
-
-“O, nothing,—only the other boys do it,” replied Ronald.
-
-“Didn’t you ever see Oscar’s anchor?” inquired Otis.
-
-“No, I didn’t know he had an anchor,” replied Miss Lee.
-
-“He _has_ got a real handsome anchor on his arm, pricked in with Indian
-ink,” continued Otis.
-
-“He made it when he was at sea,—and he has got a star like mine on his
-hand,” said Ronald.
-
-“I have noticed the star,” said Miss Lee; “but what is the use of your
-marking yourselves in that way? What do you do it for?”
-
-“Why, it looks handsome,” replied Ronald, with some hesitation.
-
-“I don’t think so—those black marks look ugly, to me,” replied Miss Lee;
-“besides, you never can wash them out.”
-
-“Why, that’s the beauty of it, Aunt Fanny,” replied Ronald, with one of
-his roguish looks. “There wouldn’t be any fun in it if it washed out.”
-
-“Perhaps you will think differently, some time or other,” said Miss Lee.
-
-“But what hurt does it do?” inquired Otis.
-
-“I don’t know that it does any harm,” replied Miss Lee; “but it always
-seemed to me like a heathenish practice. Did you know that the old
-pagans used to mark themselves in that way, in honor of their idols?”
-
-“What, did they prick Indian ink into their hands, as we do?” inquired
-Ronald.
-
-“Sometimes they pricked the marks in,” replied Miss Lee, “and sometimes
-they burnt and cut them into the flesh. If a man devoted himself to
-Jupiter, he marked himself with a thunderbolt, on the palm of his hand,
-or his wrist, or neck, or upon some other part of his body. If he chose
-Mars for his god, then the mark was a helmet or spear. Soldiers and
-slaves used sometimes to be marked in the same way, to show to what
-commander, or to what master, they belonged. Some tribes of savages, at
-the present day, are very fond of such ornaments, and tattoo their faces
-all over, by pricking dyes into their skins. There are several allusions
-to this custom in the Bible, and the Jews were forbidden to practise
-it.”
-
-[Illustration]
-
-“It’s wicked, then, to make such marks, isn’t it?” inquired Otis.
-
-“No,” replied Miss Lee, “so long as you do not make them in honor of any
-false god, nor with any bad motive, there is no sin in the act. The
-worst that can be said about it is, that it is a foolish custom, and a
-relic of paganism and superstition.”
-
-“I’m going to see if I can’t wash mine out, before it dries in,” said
-Ronald, and he hurried off to the pump, followed by Otis.
-
-For a few minutes the boys worked as hard to rub out their new ornaments
-as they had labored, a little while before, to imprint them upon their
-hands. But water, soap, and even sand, were all in vain. The stars shone
-as brightly at the end as at the beginning of the effort. While thus
-engaged, Oscar came along, and, on seeing what the boys were about,
-indulged in a hearty laugh.
-
-“Why, you little fools!” he exclaimed, “what are you trying to wash the
-ink out for?”
-
-“Because we don’t want it in,” replied Ronald.
-
-“What did you prick it in for, then?” continued Oscar.
-
-“Because we didn’t know any better, then,” said Ronald; “but Aunt Fanny
-says the heathen prick ink into their hands, and I don’t want to be a
-heathen.”
-
-“Well, if that isn’t a great idea!” exclaimed Oscar, relapsing into
-another hearty laugh. “I suppose you think I’m a heathen, then, don’t
-you?” he continued. “Well, if I’m a heathen, I guess there are a good
-many others around full as bad. I never heard any body say there was any
-harm in pricking a little Indian ink into your hand, and I don’t believe
-there is, if Aunt Fanny does say so.”
-
-“She didn’t say there was any harm in it,” replied Ronald. “She said she
-didn’t like it, because it was doing as the heathen did.”
-
-“So we ‘do as the heathen do’ when we eat, but I shan’t give up eating
-on that account,” observed Oscar.
-
-“Nor I, either,” said Otis, who was very willing to be re-converted to
-the tattooing process. “I mean to finish my star—what’s the use of
-trying to wash it out?”
-
-“Star! do you call that thing a star?” inquired Oscar, with a look of
-contempt.
-
-“But I haven’t finished it,” meekly interposed Otis.
-
-“No, I shouldn’t think you had,” added Oscar. “It looks more like a
-spider than a star. If I couldn’t make a better star than that with my
-eyes shut, I’d put my head under a bushel basket.”
-
-With this self-sufficient remark, Oscar walked off, and Ronald and Otis,
-having come to the conclusion that their stars were beyond the reach of
-soap and sand, also left the room. It happened that Mrs. Page and Miss
-Lee were sitting in an adjoining room, and overheard the conversation
-just related.
-
-One afternoon, some time after this occurrence, as Oscar was sitting
-with his Aunt Fanny, in her chamber, studying his lessons, a boy of
-about his age came along, with a gun on his shoulder, and seeing Oscar
-at the open window, called him, in a low voice—
-
-“Come, Oscar; want to go over to Prescott’s?”
-
-“No, I can’t go; I’ve got my lessons to learn,” replied Oscar.
-
-“How long before you’ll be done?” inquired the boy, whose name was
-Samuel Hapley, and who lived near by.
-
-“It will take me nearly all the afternoon, I suppose,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Then I’m off,” said the boy, resuming his course.
-
-Oscar watched him somewhat wishfully for a minute or two, as he directed
-his course through the fields, and then turned to his books. Sam Hapley
-was the only boy near his own age in that part of the town; and it also
-happened that he was the only boy in Highburg he had been cautioned
-against. His aunts and Marcus knew that he could not well avoid forming
-an acquaintance with Sam, and they did not forbid this; but they
-earnestly advised Oscar to associate with him as little as possible, and
-to beware of his evil influence. Sam’s father was intemperate. His
-mother was sickly, discouraged and disconsolate. The children, of whom
-Sam was the oldest, were neglected, their father being cross and severe
-with all of them except the youngest, and their mother always attempting
-to shield them from his displeasure, even when they had done wrong. The
-farm wore an air of thriftlessness, and, to crown their misfortunes, it
-was covered with mortgages.[2]
-
-Footnote 2:
-
- A mortgage is a pledge of property by a debtor to a creditor to secure
- a debt. For instance, a man who owns a farm wishes to borrow a
- thousand dollars, and to secure the lender from loss, he pledges his
- farm to him. The farm is then said to be mortgaged. The borrower
- cannot dispose of it, and the lender is, in effect, its real owner, to
- the amount of his claim, until that claim is paid. If it should not be
- paid when due, the lender, or mortgagee, as he is called, may sell the
- farm, after a certain time, and thus get his money back. When an
- intemperate man mortgages his property, there is little hope that he
- will ever redeem it.
-
-“You got rid of him pretty easily, that time,” said Miss Lee, as Sam
-passed along.
-
-“I know it; but I shouldn’t have gone if I had got my lessons,” replied
-Oscar.
-
-“It makes me real sad to see how that boy has changed, within ten
-years,” continued Miss Lee.
-
-“He was once a pretty, modest, gentle boy, and used to be quite a
-favorite of mine. Now, the coarse features of vice are settling upon his
-face, and he is said to be a very bad boy.”
-
-“He swears like everything,” remarked Oscar.
-
-“So I have heard,” added Aunt Fanny.
-
-“Henry swears some, too,” continued Oscar, alluding to a brother of Sam,
-about thirteen years old.
-
-“Ah, I am sorry to hear that,” said his aunt. “But it isn’t very
-strange, after all, with such an example before him. A boy of Sam’s age
-exerts a great influence on his young brothers and sisters. The little
-children look up to the large ones with a sort of fear and respect, and
-copy their ways, and imitate their example, right or wrong. Did you ever
-think how much influence of this kind you may be exerting?”
-
-“I don’t know that I ever thought much about it,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Here are three children in the family,” continued his aunt, “younger
-than you. The fact that you are older and have seen more of the world
-than they, while you are still a boy, gives you quite an influence over
-their minds. You can increase or diminish that influence, according to
-the manner in which you treat them; but you can’t wholly divest yourself
-of it. You must exert an influence over them, good or ill, in spite of
-yourself, and when you are not thinking of it. I saw an illustration of
-this, a few days ago. Otis and Ronald noticed that you had a star
-pricked into your hand, and what did they do but prick stars into
-theirs, as soon as they could get the materials!”
-
-“Oh yes, I noticed that,” said Oscar, laughing.
-
-“That was a trifling thing,” resumed Aunt Fanny, “but it illustrates a
-great truth. It shows how you are watched, and copied, and it ought to
-put you on your guard. You can use this influence so as to assist us in
-training the children to good habits, or, if you choose, you can do just
-the opposite. You see there is quite a responsibility resting upon you.
-If they see that you are studious, industrious and faithful, they will
-feel an influence drawing them in the same direction; but if you exhibit
-any bad trait, it would not be strange if they should try to pattern
-after it.”
-
-“I never thought much about that before, but I mean to look out for it
-now,” said Oscar.
-
-Nothing was said to Oscar in relation to his unguarded remarks to the
-boys about tattooing, and he never knew that he was overheard by his
-aunt. That incident, however, gave the turn to the conversation on this
-occasion.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IV.
-
- UP THE MOUNTAIN.
-
-
-OSCAR, from the day of his arrival in Highburg, had expressed a desire
-to ascend some one of the lofty mountain peaks in the neighborhood; and
-Marcus had made a sort of half promise to get up a party, some fine
-autumn day, to visit the Camel’s Hump, the highest eminence in that part
-of the State. On reflection, however, it was thought best to abandon
-this undertaking, on account of the distance of the mountain from
-Highburg, the difficulty of making the ascent, and the time that would
-be required for the expedition. But to compensate Oscar and the other
-young folks for the disappointment, it was determined, one Saturday
-afternoon, to make an excursion to a notable eminence called “Prescott’s
-Peak,” situated about two miles from Mrs. Page’s.
-
-The party consisted of Marcus, Oscar, Kate, Ronald, Otis, and Rover, the
-dog. They struck an air-line towards the mountain, through fields,
-meadows and woods, Rover strolling on ahead of the party, with an air of
-entire satisfaction.
-
-“I’ll bet Rover knows where we are going—don’t you believe he does,
-Marcus?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“I don’t know, I almost think sometimes that he knows what we say,”
-replied Marcus.
-
-“He knows a good deal that we say, any way,” remarked Otis. “You give
-him a bucket, and tell him to carry it out to the barn, and he’ll do it
-just as well as anybody; and he’ll lie down, or give you his paw, or
-speak, if you tell him to.”
-
-“One day, about a year ago,” said Marcus, “when Aunt Fanny was packing
-her trunk, to go to Grandmother’s, she told Rover she had got to leave
-him, and asked him if he didn’t want to go, too; and upon that he jumped
-right into her trunk,—as much as to say, ‘Yes, I want to go,—pack me
-in!’ When Aunt Fanny came back from her journey, it seemed as if he
-would eat her up, he was so glad to see her. He never forgets anybody
-that he has once known. Last summer, I took him over to Montpelier with
-me, where he used to live; and although he hadn’t been there for over
-two years, he remembered all his old friends, and went around and
-scratched at all the doors of the houses he used to visit when he lived
-there.”
-
-“And he’s the neatest dog that I ever heard of,—he wont come into the
-house with dirty paws,” added Kate.
-
-“No,” continued Marcus, “and once when we had our floors newly painted,
-and boards were laid to step upon, Rover understood the arrangement as
-well as we did, and was careful to walk upon the boards until the paint
-was dry.”
-
-“We had a strange dog come to our house last winter, that knew
-something,” said Otis. “He _knocked_ at the door, just as well as a man
-could have done it. Mother went to see who had come, and she found
-nothing but a dog. As soon as he saw her, he began to cry like a baby,
-he was so cold and hungry. So she gave him some dinner, and let him warm
-himself, and then he went off, and we never saw him again. But he
-knocked at the door,—tap, tap, tap,—so you couldn’t have told him from a
-man.”
-
-“I could tell a story that would beat that,” said Oscar. “I knew a dog
-in Boston that would open any door that was fastened by a latch, without
-stopping to knock; and he’d shut it, too, if you told him to.”
-
-“I could tell a story that would beat all of yours,” said Ronald. “It’s
-about a dog that _unlocks_ doors; and if he can’t find the key, he will
-hunt up a piece of wire, and _pick the lock_!”
-
-“Why, Ronald Page! how dare you tell such a lie?” exclaimed Kate, after
-the laugh that followed this sally had subsided.
-
-“It wasn’t a lie,” replied Ronald. “I didn’t say a dog ever did that—I
-said I could tell a _story_ about a dog that did it, and so I can.”
-
-“It’s a lie, for all that; I’ll leave it to Marcus if it isn’t,”
-rejoined Kate.
-
-“Not exactly a lie, although it looks something like it,” observed
-Marcus. “Ronald could not have intended to deceive anybody, when he told
-such a tough story as that, and therefore it was not a falsehood. But”—
-
-“A snake! a snake!” suddenly broke in Ronald, who was a little in
-advance of the others.
-
-“O, kill it! do kill it!” cried Kate, running back a few steps from the
-scene of danger.
-
-“No, I shan’t—you said I lied, and now you want me to commit murder, do
-you?” retorted Ronald.
-
-“Pooh! it’s nothing but the cast-off skin of a snake,” said Otis,
-lifting it upon a stick, and tossing it toward Kate, who dexterously
-dodged the missile.
-
-“That was the skin of a black snake, wasn’t it?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“Yes,” replied Ronald, “and a pretty large one, too.”
-
-[Illustration]
-
-“I saw a black snake all of six feet long, that summer I was down to
-Brookdale,” said Oscar. “Jerry and I were on a high rock, and saw the
-snake in the field below us. He was coiled up, and was watching a
-squirrel that was a little way off. We got some stones, and pelted him,
-but I believe we didn’t hit him, for we couldn’t find anything of him.”
-
-“I killed a large black snake, all alone, down in our meadow, not more
-than a month ago,” said Ronald.
-
-“Is that one of your yarns, or do you expect us to believe it?” inquired
-Oscar.
-
-“It’s the truth, sir, I’ll leave it to Marcus, if it isn’t,” replied
-Ronald.
-
-“Hold on a minute,” said Marcus, stopping by the side of a small,
-shallow pond they were passing; and, taking a stick, he began to stir up
-its muddy bottom.
-
-“What in the world is he dabbling in that dirty water for?” inquired
-Kate.
-
-“I guess he is hunting for frogs’ eggs,” said Ronald; “or, perhaps he’s
-going to make some pollywog soup.”
-
-“Do you see, he is going to set the pond afire!” cried Kate, as Marcus
-drew some friction matches from his pocket.
-
-Marcus continued his operations, without noticing the comments of his
-companions, and in a little while, he actually produced a faint yellow
-flame upon the surface of the water, to the astonishment of the company.
-He then explained to them that this was an experiment which he had
-learned while studying chemistry at the academy. When vegetable matter
-decays under water, a gas called light carburetted hydrogen is formed,
-which may be burned. On stirring up the bottom, the gas escapes, and
-rises to the top in bubbles, and may be collected in jars, or set on
-fire upon the surface of the water. This gas, he said, was the terrible
-“firedamp,” which caused such tremendous explosions in coal mines,
-before Sir Humphrey Davy invented his safety lamp, to protect the miners
-from these disasters. He told them, also, that he had seen it stated in
-a newspaper that on one of our Western rivers, when the water was very
-low, the steamboats had to shut down their furnace doors for several
-miles, and allow no torches to be lighted at night, for fear of “setting
-the river on fire!” Frequently boats that did not use these precautions
-at this particular place, have found themselves engulfed in flames,
-greatly to the alarm of the passengers, and sometimes setting the
-steamers on fire. In some instances, the passengers have come very near
-leaping overboard, before the officers could convince them that there
-was no danger; an act that would be almost literally “jumping from the
-frying-pan into the fire.”
-
-The party now resumed their course, and after skirting a swamp, and
-threading their way thro’ a tangled growth of young birches and pines,
-and breaking a path through the sharp, bristling stubble of a rye field,
-they reached the foot of the mountain. The eminence was clothed with
-that dress of unfading green from which this range takes its name,[3]
-being covered with spruce, fir, hemlock, and other evergreens, to the
-summit. They began the ascent by a narrow, steep and winding path,
-which, however, had the appearance of being much used.
-
-Footnote 3:
-
- The range was named _Verd Mont_ by the early French settlers, which
- means in English, Green Mountain. When the people declared themselves
- a free and independent State, in 1777, they adopted the French name as
- that of their Commonwealth, contracting it by the omission of the _d_.
-
-“I should think a good many people came up here, by the looks,” remarked
-Oscar.
-
-“Not many, except Gooden’s folks,” replied Marcus.
-
-“Who is Gooden?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“He is a strange fellow who lives up on the mountain,” replied Marcus.
-“We shall come to his cabin pretty soon, and perhaps you will have a
-chance to see him.”
-
-“But what does he live up here for, away from everybody?—is he cracked?”
-inquired Oscar.
-
-“He lives here because he prefers to keep out of the way of people, I
-suppose,” replied Marcus.
-
-“They say he used to steal, and got caught in a trap, once,” said Kate.
-
-“A regular _steal_ trap, wasn’t it?” inquired Ronald.
-
-“That is the common report,” added Marcus, not noticing Ronald’s pun,
-“and I suppose it is true. The story is, that where he used to live, his
-neighbors found their grain going off faster than they thought it ought
-to, and one of them set a large bear trap, with steel springs and sharp
-teeth, to catch the thief. One morning soon after, he went out to the
-barn, and found Gooden fast in the trap. It caught him around the ankle,
-and they say he was laid up for several months with a sore leg. He is a
-little lame, now, from the effects of it. As soon as he could get away,
-he came and settled in this out-of-the-way place, and lives as much like
-a hermit as he can, with his family.”
-
-“O, has he got a family?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“Yes, a wife and four children,” replied Marcus.
-
-“How does he support himself, now,—by stealing?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“No,” replied Marcus, “nobody suspects him of dishonesty, now—he is
-probably cured of that. He owns a cow, and raises corn and potatoes
-enough to support his family. He kills some game, which supplies him
-with meat. They get a little money by making maple sugar, and collecting
-spruce gum. But after all they are quite poor, and people often give
-them clothing, and other necessary articles. The children are growing up
-in ignorance, too,—they never go to school or church. They will stand a
-rather poor chance in the world, brought up in that way.”
-
-[Illustration]
-
-After toiling up the zigzag path awhile longer, the party came to an
-open, level space, and found themselves within a few rods of Gooden’s
-cabin, a small, rude structure, built of rough logs, with a large
-chimney at one end, on the outside. Several children were playing around
-the house, and the father himself was just coming in from a hunting
-excursion up the mountain, with his gun on his shoulder, and his dog by
-his side. Seeing the party approaching, Mr. Gooden went into the house
-and shut the door. Marcus had often visited the family, on errands of
-kindness, but knowing the morose and suspicious disposition of the
-father, and his antipathy to company, he concluded not to stop at the
-cabin. Exchanging a few words with Jake and Sally, the two oldest
-children, who stood staring at the strangers, Marcus passed on, with his
-party, through a path still more intricate and difficult.
-
-“You said something about spruce gum—what do they do with it?” inquired
-Oscar.
-
-“They sell it,” replied Marcus. “A man comes round here every summer,
-who makes it his business to collect spruce gum. He buys all the gum
-that is offered him, and he hires boys to gather it for him, paying them
-so much a pound. This gum is cleaned, and sent to the cities, where it
-brings a good price.”
-
-“Well, if everybody was like me, the spruce gum trade wouldn’t be worth
-much,” said Kate. “I don’t see why anybody wants to chew the nasty
-stuff, especially a young lady. How it looks, to see your jaws going the
-whole time! There are some girls in the academy that always have their
-mouths full of gum. I think it’s real disgusting.”
-
-“Chewing gum isn’t quite so bad as chewing tobacco, but it is a foolish
-and disgusting habit, as you say,” observed Marcus.
-
-The party continued their ascent up the steep and slippery side of the
-mountain, occasionally halting a few minutes to take breath. Some of
-them began to question whether there was any top to it, as each turn of
-the zigzag path, which promised to land them at the summit, only
-revealed as they advanced a still higher point beyond. But at length the
-top, the very “tip-top,” as the boys called it, was reached. Instead of
-a sharp, sky-scraping ridge, they found the summit to be a broad and
-nearly level plain, composed mostly of solid rock, and almost bare of
-vegetation. But what a view did it present! A dozen villages scattered
-among the valleys, with their nestling houses and white spires; the rich
-meadows of the Winooski and its tributaries, with their thrifty farms;
-the cattle and sheep “upon a thousand hills;” the dark and extensive
-patches of forest, in which the woodman’s axe has never yet resounded;
-the chain of mountain sentinels, drawn up in lines, conspicuous among
-which were the Camel’s Hump, and the distant Mansfield Mountain, with
-its “Nose,” “Lips” and “Chin;” the broad and peaceful expanse of Lake
-Champlain, with a faint outline of the Adirondack Mountains looming up
-beyond;—such is a very imperfect sketch of the scene that for a long
-time engrossed the attention of the whole party.
-
-After the party had rested themselves, and gazed at the extensive
-prospect as long as they wished, Oscar proposed to erect a monument on
-the summit that would be visible from their house, and would commemorate
-their ascent of the mountain. The proposal was readily agreed to by all,
-and they immediately set about gathering the necessary materials. All
-the movable stones on the summit were soon collected in a heap, but
-Marcus expressed a doubt whether there were enough to form a pile that
-would be visible below.
-
-“If we only had an axe,” said Oscar, “we could cut down a tree, and
-strip off all the branches but a few at the top; and then we could set
-the tree on the summit, and pile the stones about it to keep it in
-place.”
-
-“Has anybody got any string about him?” inquired Otis.
-
-There was a general fumbling of pockets, and among a score of
-miscellaneous articles produced was a piece of old fishing-line
-belonging to Ronald.
-
-“That’s just the thing,” said Otis. “Now we will find a tree that has
-blown down, and tie a lot of new branches to the top of it, and stick it
-up, as Oscar said.”
-
-This proposal was adopted. A tall, straight sapling was soon found, that
-had fallen before the furious winter blasts that play among the Peak.
-Its branches, now partially decayed, were broken off, and the trunk made
-as clean as possible, with the exception of the top. A quantity of
-evergreen boughs were then procured, and lashed to the top of the
-sapling by the fishing-line. The signal pole, with its heavy tuft, was
-now raised to its place by the united strength of the party, and the
-stones piled compactly around its bottom, until it seemed as firm as
-though rooted in the earth. Three cheers were given for the monument,
-and then, after a short resting-spell, the party began to descend.
-
-With merry shouts and laughter they were bounding, sliding and tumbling
-down the steep side of the mountain, the boys sometimes far outstripping
-Kate and Marcus, and then pausing awhile, to see how their more moderate
-companions got along. In this way they had proceeded nearly a quarter of
-a mile from the summit, when Kate suddenly brought them to a stand by
-exclaiming—
-
-“I declare! if I haven’t left my veil on the top of the mountain! I took
-it off when we were looking at the scenery, because it was in my way,
-and I forgot to put it on again.”
-
-“That’s just like you,” said her brother; “you are always forgetting
-something.”
-
-“Never mind, I’ll run back and get it—it wont take but a few minutes,”
-said Oscar.
-
-“No, let me go—I’m more used to it than Oscar is,” exclaimed Ronald.
-
-“I’d let her go herself—it would make her more careful next time,” said
-Otis, in a low tone, which he did not intend Marcus should hear.
-
-“Ronald is the nimblest, and he has been up the mountain before; so I
-think he had better go and get the veil, and we will wait for him till
-he gets back,” said Marcus.
-
-Ronald accordingly scrambled up the hill again, while the others seated
-themselves on the dry leaves beneath a noble pine.
-
-“I don’t see what girls want to wear veils for,” said Otis, somewhat
-petulantly, after they were seated.
-
-“It isn’t necessary for you to know why they wear them, Master Otis,”
-replied Kate, quite coolly.
-
-“I have no objection to girls’ wearing veils, if they choose to, but I
-don’t like to see boys wear such things,” said Marcus.
-
-“Why, did you ever see boys wear veils?” inquired Otis, with surprise.
-
-“I have seen boys that I thought acted as if they wore veils over their
-eyes,” replied Marcus.
-
-“How did they act?” inquired Otis, after a moment’s pause.
-
-“They acted as if they could not see things that were as plain as a
-pike-staff to other people,” replied Marcus.
-
-Otis seemed to be trying to interpret to himself this enigmatical
-language, but did not appear inclined to ask any more questions.
-
-“For instance,” added Marcus, after a brief pause, “when you see a boy
-rude or unkind towards his sister, when there is no provocation, you may
-conclude that he has a veil or something else over his eyes; for if he
-could see plainly how such conduct looks to other people’s eyes, he
-would not indulge in it.”
-
-Otis apparently understood the point of the remark, and felt it, too;
-but he made no reply. In a few minutes a merry shout announced the
-approach of Ronald, and he soon appeared, with the lost veil fastened to
-his straw hat. He claimed the privilege of wearing it home, which Kate
-readily granted; but before the party came in sight of the log cabin, he
-concluded to surrender it to its owner.
-
-Going down the mountain proved almost as difficult and exciting as
-climbing up, and many a slip and tumble happened to one and another, on
-the way. Sometimes a low branch across the path, bent from its place and
-then let loose by one, would bring up the boy behind with a whack that
-made him see stars. By one of these flying limbs Otis had his cap
-suddenly removed from his head, and whirled over a precipice, lodging in
-the top of a tall tree below. The disaster was followed by a prolonged
-and hearty shout from those who witnessed it, and the others hastened to
-the spot, to see what the matter was.
-
-“I’ll get it for you, Oty—I can climb that tree easy enough,” exclaimed
-Ronald, as soon as he comprehended the extent of the mishap.
-
-“No,” said Marcus, with assumed gravity, “let him get his cap himself—it
-will make him more careful next time.”
-
-“I don’t see what boys wear caps for; they are always losing them,”
-remarked Kate, the fun in her eyes but half concealed.
-
-“It wasn’t my fault—I couldn’t help it,” replied Otis, with the utmost
-seriousness. “Ronald let the branch fly right into my face, and it took
-my cap off before I knew it was coming.”
-
-“Well, if Ronald is to blame, I think we shall have to send him after
-the cap,” said Marcus.
-
-They made their way, with some difficulty, to the spot where the tree
-stood. Ronald, being a more expert climber than any of the others, was
-entrusted with the job, and ascended the tree almost with the agility of
-a squirrel. He took with him a pole, and with its aid the cap was soon
-dislodged, and sent to the ground below.
-
-No further incidents of importance befell the party, on their descent of
-the mountain. Mr. Gooden did not manifest himself to them, as they
-passed his cabin; and none of his family were visible. They reached
-their home, tired and hungry, in season to get a view of the signal they
-had raised, after the sun had sunk behind Prescott’s Peak; and there the
-tall sapling stood, for a long time afterwards, reminding them of their
-pleasant tramp “up the mountain.”
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER V.
-
- THE BLOTTED WRITING-BOOK.
-
-
-THERE were loud demonstrations of joy among the juvenile members of the
-household, one morning, when Marcus handed a letter to Kate, for Mr.
-Upton, the principal of the academy, and informed them that it contained
-his acceptance of the office of assistant teacher in that institution,
-for the winter term. The appointment had been offered him several weeks
-previous, and had been the subject of much consideration on the part of
-Marcus, and of no little interest, also, among the children, who were
-all anxious to have Marcus for a teacher, notwithstanding he repeatedly
-forewarned them, that if he should show them any particular favor as
-their instructor, it would only be by looking more sharply after them
-than he did after the other scholars.
-
-“Three cheers for Master Page!” shouted Ronald, and they were given,
-with as much power as four noisy throats could command.
-
-“You know me, Marcus,—you’ll excuse me from writing compositions, wont
-you?” inquired Kate, when the noise had subsided.
-
-“You know me, too, Marcus,—you wont make me speak pieces, will you?”
-said Otis.
-
-“You know me, Master Page,—you wont make me do any thing, will you?”
-added Ronald, capping the climax.
-
-“Yes, I know you, you young rogue, and if you don’t walk straight you’ll
-catch it!” said Marcus, in reply to the last speaker.
-
-Ronald did not take the admonition much to heart; but concluded his
-demonstrations of delight by throwing his cap over an apple tree,
-turning two somersets, and crowing like a “rooster,” whose clarion notes
-he could imitate with ludicrous fidelity. Then, leaping upon the back of
-Otis, who with Kate was just starting for school, he disappeared; but
-his voice was uppermost among the joyous shouts and laughter that came
-across the fields long after their departure.
-
-Kate and Otis did not usually go home from school at noon, but carried
-their dinners with them, the distance being too great to walk. Ronald,
-however, generally dined at home, the district school, which he was now
-attending, being less than a mile distant from Mrs. Page’s. In the
-course of the forenoon, before the hour of school dismission, as Marcus
-was at work throwing up muck from a meadow, he was surprised to see
-Ronald approaching, on the road leading to the house. “He must be sick,”
-thought Marcus, as he noticed how slowly he walked, and how silent and
-dejected he appeared. What a change had come over the light-hearted boy,
-within two hours!
-
-Ronald appeared to hesitate a moment, and then turned into the meadow,
-towards Marcus. As soon as he was within speaking distance, the latter
-inquired what the matter was. Ronald made no reply until he had reached
-the place where Marcus stood, and then he exclaimed:—
-
-“I’m not going to _that_ school any more—I’ve been licked for nothing,
-and I wont stand it!”
-
-“And how came you home at this time of day?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“I ran away from school,” replied Ronald.
-
-“Indeed!” said Marcus; “and will you please to explain why?”
-
-“Mrs. Benham set out to lick me——”
-
-“Begin at the beginning, and tell the whole story,” interrupted Marcus.
-“What did she punish you for?”
-
-“Why, you see she was real cross this morning,” said Ronald; “I saw it
-as soon as she got there, and thought there’d be a squall before night.
-Well, I was studying my lesson, and she came along, and wanted to look
-at my writing-book. So I handed it to her, and she opened it, and found
-four or five great blots on the page I wrote yesterday afternoon. She
-looked real mad, and asked me what it meant, and I told her I didn’t do
-it, and didn’t know anything about it. Then she said I lied, and she’d
-whip me for blotting the book, and for lying, too. So she made me go out
-to the platform, and began to put on the ratan over my hands, just as
-hard as she could. See that,” continued Ronald, showing to Marcus
-several red stripes on the palm of his hand. “I couldn’t stand that, so
-I got the stick away from her, and ran off as fast as I could. I didn’t
-blot the book, nor tell a lie, and I wont be whipped for nothing by Mrs.
-Benham, I know.”
-
-“Have you told me the truth, about this affair, and nothing but the
-truth?” inquired Marcus, fixing a steady gaze upon Ronald.
-
-“Yes, sir, I’ve told the real truth, and nothing else,” replied Ronald.
-
-“Is it the whole truth?” inquired Marcus. “Have you not kept something
-back?”
-
-“Why, I pulled the teacher over, when I got the stick away,—I believe I
-didn’t tell you about that,” replied Ronald, in a lower tone. “I didn’t
-mean to do it, though. She was on the edge of the platform, and I was
-standing on the floor, and when I caught the ratan and jerked it away,
-she fell upon the floor, somehow, and then I ran off.”
-
-“How do you know that she was not injured by the fall?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“O, it didn’t hurt her, for she chased me out to the door, and shook her
-fist at me,—I turned around and saw her,” replied Ronald.
-
-“Well, you have got yourself into a pretty scrape,” said Marcus, “and
-it’s my opinion you have not seen the worst of it yet. According to your
-own story, you are liable to be arrested for assault and battery, and
-what’s to be done, then?”
-
-“I didn’t assault her, nor batter her; she held on to the stick, and I
-just pulled her over, that was all,” replied Ronald.
-
-“You resisted your teacher, and pulled her upon the floor; and that is
-sufficient, I think, to constitute what the law terms assault and
-battery,” said Marcus. “At any rate, I do not see but that you will have
-to go back and apologize to her, before the school, and then let her
-finish the flogging she intended to give you, if she chooses. I think
-that would be the easiest way to settle the difficulty. You had better
-go home and tell mother about it, and see what she says.”
-
-Ronald turned away with a sadder heart than ever. He revolted at the
-thought of a public apology and submission, and secretly determined that
-he would not yield to such a humiliation. He went home and told his
-story to Mrs. Page, who seemed much grieved and troubled by his conduct.
-She questioned him very closely about the blots on the writing-book,
-from which all the trouble sprang; but he protested that he knew nothing
-about them, with great apparent sincerity. Still, she remembered that
-Ronald was much addicted to lying, when he came to live with her; and
-though the habit had been broken up, by patient labor and often severe
-discipline, there was a lurking fear that he might possibly have
-relapsed, under a strong temptation.
-
-When Marcus came in to dinner, Ronald’s case was freely discussed, and
-the conclusion appeared to be unanimous that they could not sustain him
-in the course he had taken, even if he were innocent of the fault for
-which he was punished. It was argued that a school government must, of
-necessity, be a sort of absolute monarchy. The teacher, although
-responsible to the community, and more immediately to the committee, if
-it be a public school, is _not_ accountable to his pupils. Among _them_
-he is king, and resistance to his authority is treason. He may sometimes
-seem unreasonable in his requirements, but his scholars are not the best
-judges of this. He may even sometimes punish the innocent, by mistake;
-but in such a case, it is better to submit to a little temporary pain
-and mortification, trusting in a future redress or reparation, rather
-than to defy or resist his authority in the presence of the school,
-thereby shaking the foundation of his government. So reasoned Mrs. Page,
-Aunt Fanny, and Marcus, and they thus reached the conclusion that Ronald
-was guilty of a flagrant offence in school, and was liable to expulsion,
-if not prosecution.
-
-In the afternoon, just before it was time to dismiss school, Marcus went
-to see the teacher, taking Ronald with him, who, by the way, was quite
-reluctant to go. Mrs. Benham received them politely, and after the
-school closed, Marcus told her Ronald had informed him that he had had a
-difficulty with her, and requested her to give him an account of the
-affair.
-
-“Something more than a difficulty,” replied the teacher; “it was a
-downright attack upon me, and I feel the effects of it yet. I never was
-abused in that way by a boy before. The way it commenced was this: I
-asked Ronald to let me look at his writing-book, and I found several
-large blots on the last page he wrote. I felt doubly provoked, because
-his was the neatest writing-book in the boys’ department, and I wished
-it kept nice, for the committee to examine. When I called him to account
-for the blots, he answered, as children are apt to do in such a case,
-that he didn’t know anything about them, and never saw them before. That
-was a very improbable story, and I felt almost sure, from his actions,
-that he was telling me a lie. So I told him I should be obliged to
-punish him if he attempted to deceive me. He answered, in an impudent
-tone, that ‘he hadn’t done anything, and wasn’t going to be whipped for
-nothing.’ I talked with him further about it, and tried to persuade him
-to tell the truth, but he grew more obstinate and saucy, and threatened
-that he would never come to school again if I punished him. I thought it
-was time then to take him in hand, so I began to punish him with the
-ratan; but before I had given him half a dozen blows, he caught hold of
-the stick, and in jerking it away from me, some how threw me down upon
-the floor. He then ran off and took my stick with him. I hurt my
-shoulder, in falling, and it is quite sore, now.”
-
-“You didn’t tell me you were impudent, Ronald; why did you keep that
-back?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“I didn’t know that I was impudent,” replied Ronald.
-
-“You said I shouldn’t punish you, and that you would never come to
-school again if I did; shouldn’t you call that impudent, Marcus?”
-inquired the teacher.
-
-“Yes, I call that impudent language, when addressed to a teacher,”
-replied Marcus. “Still, I think he may not have _intended_ to be
-saucy—that is a fault he is not much addicted to. What did you do with
-Mrs. Benham’s stick, Ronald?”
-
-“I broke it, and threw it into the swamp,” replied Ronald.
-
-Marcus expressed a wish to see the blotted writing-book, and it was
-handed to him. After a close examination, he discovered that the blots
-were of a lighter color than the writing upon the page, indicating one
-of two things: 1st, They were made with a different ink from that which
-Ronald used; or, 2d, They had been recently made, and the ink had not
-yet acquired its perfect color from contact with the air. This
-discovery, however, gave no clew to the mystery, although it proved that
-Ronald did not blot the book when he last used it. Ronald now renewed
-his protestations of innocence, with such apparent sincerity, that
-Marcus felt satisfied he was telling the truth, especially as he had not
-known him to adhere stubbornly to a falsehood for several years. His
-teacher also admitted the possibility of his innocence so far as that
-offence was concerned, but thought he had done enough, independent of
-that, to justify her in excluding him from the school.
-
-“We admit that he has done wrong,” said Marcus, “but we should be very
-sorry to have him expelled from school. He expects to leave next month,
-but he mustn’t go with such a stain as this upon his name. On what
-conditions will you consent to his coming back to school?”
-
-Mrs. Benham thought a moment, and then replied:—
-
-“I do not wish to be harsh or unreasonable with Ronald. If he is sorry
-for what he has done, and is willing to say so before the school, that
-is enough. As the offence was committed before the whole school, I do
-not think I ought to ask less than that.”
-
-“I think that is reasonable,” replied Marcus. “Are you willing to do it,
-Ronald?”
-
-Ronald made no reply until the question had been repeated several times,
-and then he merely shook his head negatively.
-
-“Well, perhaps he will change his mind before to-morrow morning,” said
-Marcus, addressing the teacher; and bidding her good evening, he started
-for home, followed by Ronald.
-
-Marcus said little to the boy, on their way home, preferring to leave
-him to his own thoughts—not very pleasant company to be sure, but
-perhaps the best for him, under the circumstances. Before Ronald went to
-bed, however, Mrs. Page talked with him a little while about the affair.
-There were three classes of motives by which she endeavored to persuade
-him to comply with the teacher’s requirement. First she appealed to his
-affection for her—a motive that seldom failed to take effect upon
-Ronald. Then she appealed to reason, and tried to overcome him by
-argument. Finally she resorted to a lower and more selfish class of
-motives, and portrayed the disgrace of being expelled from school, and
-the instantaneous relief of mind he would find in confessing his fault.
-Still the proud spirit was unsubdued.
-
-After a troubled night, Ronald awoke in quite as unhappy a frame of mind
-as ever. He went about his morning’s work, silently, and the other
-children, not wishing to intermeddle in his trouble, kept so much aloof
-that he fancied they shunned him. Oscar, however, remembering a lesson
-that had recently been impressed upon his mind, cast his influence upon
-the right side, and advised Ronald to yield. Still the stubborn will
-revolted at the thought.
-
-It was a settled principle with Mrs. Page, that when a child refuses to
-be governed by such motives as may be drawn from love, reason, the hope
-of reward, and the fear of punishment, it is time for authority to
-assume its stern sway. Having exhausted these motives upon Ronald, in
-vain, there remained but one other—YOU MUST; and this she proceeded to
-apply.
-
-“Ronald,” she said, a little while before school time, “it is time to be
-fixing for school; and here is a note which I wish you to take to the
-teacher.”
-
-“Have I got to go to school to-day?” inquired Ronald, in a tone of
-surprise, as though such a possibility had not occurred to him.
-
-“Yes,” replied Mrs. Page, in a calm but firm manner, “you are going to
-school this morning, and as soon as it opens you will make a public
-apology for your conduct yesterday. I have written to your teacher that
-you will do so. You must carry a stick, too, in place of the one you
-threw away. Marcus will give it to you.”
-
-“But what must I say?” inquired Ronald, his eyes swimming with tears.
-
-“Tell her you are sorry for what you did yesterday, and ask her to
-forgive you. That is all you need say.”
-
-With a sad countenance and a heavy heart, Ronald turned his steps
-towards the school-house. Reluctant though he was to go, he hurried on
-his way, hoping to reach the school-room before many of the scholars had
-assembled. He began to realize his unpleasant situation as he noticed
-that a group of little girls were eyeing him curiously, and evidently
-making him the subject of remark. Soon a squad of boys noticed his
-approach, and commenced a volley of rough salutations.
-
-“Halloo, Ron! going to take the rest of that licking to-day?” cried one.
-
-“Ha, old fellow! you’ll catch it—I bet you will,” said another.
-
-“You’ve got to be turned out of school—teacher said so,” cried out
-another.
-
-Ronald passed on without replying to his young tormentors, and entering
-the school-room, deposited the letter and the new ratan upon the
-teacher’s desk. He then took his seat, and tremblingly awaited the
-opening of the school. Mrs. Benham soon came in, and, after hastily
-reading the letter, gave the signal for the school to assemble. As soon
-as the opening exercises were over, Ronald arose, and in a low,
-tremulous voice said:—
-
-“Mrs. Benham, I am very sorry for what I did yesterday, and I beg your
-pardon.”
-
-Perfect stillness reigned throughout the room, broken only by the sobs
-of Ronald, as he sat down and burst into tears. The painful silence was
-quickly relieved by the teacher, who, grasping Ronald kindly by the
-hand, said, with much feeling:—
-
-“I forgive you, with all my heart, Ronald, and I am glad you have
-manliness enough to confess your fault, and ask forgiveness. You have
-acted very honorably, in doing this, and I shall think all the better of
-you for it, hereafter. We will bury the past and be good friends again,”
-and she gave his hand a new shake. Then turning to the school she
-continued, “I have a confession to make, too. I am now satisfied that
-Ronald was not guilty of the offence for which I undertook to punish him
-yesterday. He says he does not know how his writing-book was blotted,
-and I believe him. I was too hasty, in punishing him, and am sorry for
-it. I ask his forgiveness. And I hope the one that blotted the book will
-come forward and own it, and relieve him from all suspicion of
-falsehood.”
-
-The teacher paused, and looked around the room, but no one responded to
-the call. She then continued:—
-
-“I am very sorry to think there is one here who can be so dishonorable,
-and unjust, and mean, as to try to conceal his fault under these
-circumstances. I am sure he cannot have a very quiet conscience.”
-
-The kind, forgiving spirit of the teacher, and her readiness to
-acknowledge her own error, completely subdued the proud heart of Ronald.
-He felt truly glad that he had confessed his fault. Indeed, with his
-present feelings, he would have cheerfully done it, of his own free
-will. Not only was a heavy burden removed from his mind, but he felt a
-new and stronger affection for his teacher, realizing the truth of the
-saying, that “whoever is forgiven much, will love much.”
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VI.
-
- LETTER-WRITING.
-
-
-SEVERAL weeks had elapsed, since Oscar’s regular daily tasks were set,
-and he continued to discharge his duties in a satisfactory manner. The
-wood-pile grew a little, weekly, under his management, and the kitchen
-was always kept well supplied with fuel. He had become quite expert in
-cutting hay and feeding the cows and horses, and the latter he cleaned,
-harnessed and drove, with the air of a veteran horseman. The hogs, of
-whom he had the principal care, seemed quite contented under their new
-master, and rewarded his attentions with many grunts of satisfaction, if
-not gratitude. He had assisted cheerfully in gathering the late crops of
-the farm, and had even acknowledged that milking the cows was not so
-disagreeable work as he had imagined. His lessons, also, were for the
-most part well learned. To be sure they were not very hard, being mostly
-reviews of studies he had previously gone over. But his natural
-abilities as a scholar were good, and he learned easily, when he set
-about it in earnest. The only exercise that gave him serious trouble was
-the dreaded Saturday’s “composition,” which, indeed, was more terrible
-in anticipation than in reality.
-
-“Isn’t it almost time to answer some of your letters, Oscar?” inquired
-Marcus one morning, as the former was about sitting down to his lessons.
-
-“I suppose it is,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Let me see,” continued Marcus, “you have had letters from your mother,
-and from Alice, and from Clinton—these have all got to be answered. And
-then you promised to write to Willie, or ‘Whistler,’ as you call him,
-did you not?”
-
-“Yes,” replied Oscar.
-
-“I’m afraid you are a rather negligent correspondent,” added Marcus. “I
-wouldn’t get into that habit, if I were you. While you are away from
-home, you will want to hear from your friends occasionally; but if you
-neglect them, they will be apt to neglect you.”
-
-“But I hate to write letters,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Do you consider that a sufficient reason for neglecting to answer the
-letters of your friends?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“No,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Neither do I,” continued Marcus. “So I think you had better sit right
-down and attend to your correspondence, to-day, instead of getting any
-lessons. You will have time enough to write all four of the letters. You
-had better go to your chamber, where you will be out of the way of
-interruption. You have paper and ink, I believe?”
-
-“Yes,” responded Oscar.
-
-“That reminds me of something else, that I want to say to you,” added
-Marcus. “I have noticed within a few days that you are getting in the
-habit of saying ‘yes,’ ‘no,’ ‘what?’ etc., when speaking to your elders.
-I noticed it yesterday, when you were talking with Mr. Burr, and I have
-heard you speak to mother and Aunt Fanny in the same way. It is a little
-thing, I know, but it always sounds unpleasantly to my ears. It is
-disrespectful, and shows ill breeding. Somehow, I am very apt to form a
-bad opinion of a boy or girl who speaks in that way. It is my opinion
-that many a boy has missed a good situation, by just saying ‘yes,’ ‘no,’
-or ‘what?’ when he applied for a place, instead of ‘yes, sir,’ ‘no,
-sir,’ or ‘what, sir?’ That is worth thinking of, if there were no other
-motive; don’t you see it is?”
-
-“Yes—sir,” replied Oscar, nearly forgetting the very word they were
-talking about.
-
-“So far as I am concerned, personally,” continued Marcus, “I have no
-claim to be _sirred_ by you, as there is a difference of only a few
-years in our ages. Still, as your example will have much influence over
-Ronald, I thought I had better mention the subject to you. Besides, I
-may become your teacher in a few weeks, and you know ‘Master Page’ will
-have to stand upon his dignity a little, in the schoolroom, whether
-‘Cousin Marcus’ chooses to or not. At any rate, I hope you will try to
-speak respectfully to older people, if you do not to me. There, I wont
-detain you any longer—you can go to work on your letters as soon as you
-please.”
-
-Oscar went to his room, and, having arranged his paper, ink and pen, sat
-down by the open window, for it was a mild Indian-summer day. He first
-read over the letters he was to answer, and then began to think what he
-should write in reply. But, failing to keep his mind upon the subject
-before him, his thoughts gradually wandered off, until he quite forgot
-the business in hand. As he sat in a dreamy mood, gazing upon the hills,
-prominent among which was Prescott’s Peak, with its signal still erect,
-he descried a large bird sailing majestically through the air, nearly
-overhead. It was at a great height, but as it approached the hills it
-descended, and disappeared in the woods near their base. A few minutes
-afterward it again soared aloft, and, wheeling around the Peak, as if
-taking an observation of the monument which the boys had erected, it
-appeared to descend near the summit, where Oscar finally lost sight of
-it.
-
-Oscar was satisfied that the strange bird was an eagle, and as he sat
-patiently watching for its reappearance, he thought what a fine shot it
-offered, and imagined himself on the mountain, gun in hand, stealthily
-pursuing the noble game. Now it alights upon a tall tree, within
-rifle-shot. Cautiously the boy-hunter takes aim; “crack!” goes the
-fowling-piece; and down tumbles the monarch of the air, crashing through
-the branches of the tree. His feathers are stained with blood; but his
-fierce eye flashes defiance at his murderer, as he approaches, and with
-his powerful wing he well-nigh breaks the arm that is stretched out to
-secure him. After a desperate struggle, he is despatched by a blow from
-the butt of the weapon, and is borne home in triumph—a heavy task—to the
-wonder and admiration of the whole neighborhood.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-But Oscar’s kindling imagination is not satisfied with this feat. It
-must try again. The bird eludes his gun, but he follows it, and
-discovers its haunt, on a steep and rocky precipice, near one of the
-mountain summits. Throwing aside his gun, and grasping such scanty and
-stunted trees as are at hand, he boldly lowers himself down the
-frightful chasm. One misstep, the giving way of a single slender twig,
-would plunge him headlong to destruction; but what cares he for that?
-There is a prize below, and he is determined to have it. Now he catches
-a glimpse of the nest, on a narrow, shelving rock, and for the first
-time discovers that there are two old birds, which, with outspread
-wings, are guarding their young brood. Undaunted, he descends the steep
-and slippery rocks, till he is almost within reach of the nest. Now the
-eagles, roused to fury, fly at him, and with wing, beak and talon
-commence the assault. Supporting himself by one hand, he uses the other
-and one foot to ward off the assailants. Long the battle rages, and
-again and again the adventurous hunter seems almost overcome; but when
-about to sink down, faint and gasping, the birds, battered and
-exhausted, give up the contest in despair. The boy seizes the prize,
-scrambles up the fearful precipice, and hurries home, to raise a brood
-of eagles.
-
-“But this isn’t writing my letters,” exclaimed Oscar to himself,
-suddenly awaking from his day dream. “A whole hour gone, and not a line
-written yet. Well, I’ll go about it, now. I think I’ll write to mother
-first. Let me think—what day of the month is it? I am sure I can’t
-tell—I must run down stairs and find out.”
-
-Oscar went down to the sitting-room, and, by referring to a newspaper,
-ascertained the date. But, before he laid the paper aside, his eye was
-attracted by the heading of a story, and, on reading a few lines, he
-became so much interested in it, that he took the journal up to his
-room, and thought of nothing else until he had finished reading the
-piece. Then, remembering his neglected task, he hurriedly arranged his
-paper, and wrote the date and complimentary address. But the ink did not
-flow freely from his pen, and, taking a sheet of waste paper, he
-commenced scribbling upon it, to see if he could remedy the trouble. How
-long he continued this diversion, he was scarcely aware, but at length
-it was interrupted by a step on the stairs, and a knock at his door.
-Quickly concealing the well scribbled evidence of his idleness, he bade
-the visitor walk in, and Marcus entered.
-
-“Well, how do you get along?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“Not very well,” replied Oscar. “I have been hindered by one thing and
-another, ever since I began. To begin with, just after I came up here, I
-saw an eagle flying over. Didn’t you see it?”
-
-“No—but are you sure it was an eagle?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“Why, yes, it must have been an eagle,” replied Oscar. “It was the
-largest bird I ever saw, and I should think he was all of a mile high
-when he flew over. He lit on the Peak, and that was the last I saw of
-him.”
-
-“Yes, I remember, now,—I did see a hawk over in that neighborhood, and
-that must have been your eagle,” quietly observed Marcus.
-
-Oscar did not relish such a summary disposal of his eagle story, and was
-about to protest against it, when Marcus inquired how many letters he
-had finished.
-
-“None,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Not one!” exclaimed Marcus; “and is that the beginning of the first
-letter?” glancing at the sheet which contained the date and address.
-
-“Yes, sir,” said Oscar.
-
-“Ah, you have been reading the newspaper, as well as watching hawks,”
-continued Marcus, as his eye fell upon the printed sheet.
-
-“I got that to see about the date,” replied Oscar, forgetting that
-sometimes there is little difference between half of a truth and a lie.
-
-“What _have_ you been doing all the forenoon, then?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“The ink is so thick that I couldn’t write,” added Oscar.
-
-“Let me try it,” said Marcus; and he seated himself in Oscar’s chair,
-and, looking for some waste paper, drew out the sheet which his cousin
-had covered with all sorts of flourishes, figures, puzzles, etc. “I
-think the ink must flow pretty freely, if it is thick,” he quietly
-added.
-
-Having satisfied himself that the ink was not to blame, Marcus said he
-was sorry the letters were not finished, as he was expecting to drive
-over to an adjoining town, in the afternoon, and intended to let Oscar
-accompany him, if his task was completed. Oscar said he thought he could
-finish the letters after he got back; but his cousin was far from
-agreeing with him in this opinion.
-
-“No,” said Marcus, “you will hardly get through this afternoon,
-supposing you work diligently. I think you had better not stop even for
-dinner, but I will bring you up something to eat, so that you need lose
-no time. I want you to finish the four letters before you leave the
-room, if possible.”
-
-Oscar hardly knew whether to consider himself a prisoner, or not, so
-pleasantly had Marcus addressed him. He concluded, however, that it was
-time to go to work, and was soon deeply engaged in the letter to his
-mother. Now that his mind was aroused, and his attention fixed, he found
-no difficulty in writing, and the letter was about completed, when
-Marcus appeared, with a light repast, instead of the accustomed
-substantial noonday meal.
-
-“I never feel like writing, after a hearty meal,—so I have brought you a
-light dinner,” said Marcus, setting the tray upon the table.
-
-“What time shall you start?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“In about an hour,” was the reply.
-
-“I have got one letter about done,” said Oscar, “and I can finish
-another before you go. Don’t you suppose I could finish the other two
-after we get back?”
-
-“I am afraid not,” replied Marcus. “You will have but little time, then,
-and besides, you wont feel like writing. I think you had better finish
-your letters before you do anything else. Perhaps you can get them done
-in season to mail them to-day.”
-
-Marcus now withdrew, and in the course of an hour drove off upon his
-errand. When he returned, he found the family at tea, and Oscar with
-them.
-
-“Well, Oscar, have you written all your letters?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“Yes, sir, and carried them to the post office, too,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Ah, you have been pretty smart—that is, if you didn’t make them too
-short,” observed Marcus.
-
-“They are about as long as my letters generally are,” replied Oscar
-
-“You found no great difficulty in writing, when you bent your mind down
-to it, did you?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“No, sir, not much.”
-
-“I supposed you wouldn’t,” continued Marcus. “Mother, I’ve been thinking
-of a plan, this afternoon, for making letter-writing pleasant, and I
-want your opinion of it.”
-
-“I think highly of letter-writing as an exercise,” said Mrs. Page, “and
-if you can devise a way to make the children like it, I shall be very
-glad.”
-
-“I can’t see what makes boys hate to write letters so—for my part I like
-to do it,” said Kate.
-
-“Yes, I should think you liked it—you write half a dozen billets every
-day, in school,” interposed Otis.
-
-“Why, Otis Sedgwick, what a story! I don’t believe I have averaged more
-than one note a day, this whole term,” replied Kate.
-
-“Well, that speaks pretty well for your epistolary taste, if you have
-done nothing more,” said Marcus. “But let me explain my plan. I propose
-that we have a letter-box put up in some part of the house, and that
-every one in the family engage to write one letter a week to some other
-member, and drop it into the box, which we might call our post office.
-The greatest liberty might be allowed, in the choice of subjects and
-style, and the letters might be anonymous, or written in an assumed
-character, if preferred. If any one wanted to ask a favor, or make a
-complaint, or offer a suggestion, or correct an error, or drop a word of
-caution or reproof, or indulge a fancy, or make sport, this would afford
-a good opportunity to do it. What do you think of the plan, mother?”
-
-“I think it is a good idea, and I shall vote for giving it a fair
-trial,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-“And how does it strike you, Aunt Fanny?” continued Marcus.
-
-“Very favorably,” replied Miss Lee. “If you can interest the young folks
-in it, I have no doubt it will work well.”
-
-“O, I think it is a capital idea—I shall vote for it with both hands,”
-exclaimed Kate.
-
-“And what say you, Oscar?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“I suppose I must come into the arrangement, if all the others do,”
-replied Oscar, smiling.
-
-“Not much enthusiasm there,” observed Marcus; “but we’ll excuse him, as
-he has been writing letters all day. Well, Otis, what do you say to the
-plan?”
-
-“I hate to write letters,” replied Otis.
-
-“Very likely,” said Marcus; “and that is precisely the reason why you
-ought to come into our arrangement, for we are going to try to make
-letter-writing easy and pleasant.”
-
-“Well, I’ll agree to it,” said Otis.
-
-“Of course you wont hang back, Ronald?” added Marcus.
-
-“I don’t know about that,” replied Ronald. “Couldn’t I be mail-boy, or
-post-master, or something of that sort, and so be excused from writing?”
-
-“We probably shall not need your services in that line—we can help
-ourselves to our letters,” replied Marcus.
-
-“Well, I’ll join your society on one condition,” said Ronald, with an
-air of grave importance.
-
-“What is that?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“That you shan’t make us write long letters,” was the reply.
-
-“Your letters may be as long or as short as you choose to make them,”
-replied Marcus. “We have all agreed to the plan—now I think it would be
-well to have a few written rules, to govern us. Perhaps we can arrange
-that after we get through our work this evening.”
-
-The proposal was approved, and in the evening the subject was again
-brought up. All were invited to offer such suggestions as occurred to
-them.
-
-“Would it not be well enough for us to resolve ourselves into a society,
-and adopt a name?” inquired Aunt Fanny.
-
-“I think it would,—what shall we call it?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“The Post Office Society,” suggested Otis.
-
-“The Literary Fraternity,” proposed Kate.
-
-“The Letter-writing Society,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-The latter name was finally adopted, as being more expressive than the
-others. Aunt Fanny then suggested that the title needed the addition of
-some qualifying word, to make it more definite and distinctive.
-
-“Call it the Highburg Letter-writing Society,” said Kate.
-
-“There are only seven of us, and I doubt whether it would be exactly
-modest to appropriate the name of the town to our association,” remarked
-Mrs. Page.
-
-“The Page Letter-writing Society,” suggested Ronald.
-
-“The Excelsior Letter-writing Society,” proposed Kate.
-
-“That is better,” said Marcus. “Does anybody object to it? No; so we
-will call that point settled. Now please to suggest rules for our
-government.”
-
-“Every member must write at least one letter weekly to some other
-member,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-“And if any one fails to contribute his share to the stock of letters,
-what shall be done to him?” inquired Miss Lee.
-
-“Turn him out,” said Otis.
-
-“Debar him from taking any letters from the office, until he has made
-good all deficiencies,” suggested Mrs. Page.
-
-This latter proposal was adopted, and further suggestions called for.
-
-“All letters must be sealed,” suggested Kate.
-
-“And pre-paid,” added Ronald.
-
-“I hardly think it necessary to seal the letters,” said Marcus. “Perhaps
-we had better leave that optional with the writer.”
-
-“But I think the one that receives the letter ought to have something to
-say about that, as well as the writer,” said Kate.
-
-“Well, I have no objection to your rule, if no one else has,” said
-Marcus.
-
-Several other rules were agreed to, and noted down by Marcus. When
-completed, the list of regulations stood as follows:
-
-
- “REGULATIONS OF THE EXCELSIOR LETTER-WRITING SOCIETY.
-
-“Each member shall write at least one letter per week to some other
-member.
-
-“Any member who fails to comply with this rule, without a reasonable
-excuse, shall forfeit his right to take letters from the post office
-until his delinquency is made good.
-
-“Each member shall divide his epistolary favors as equally among the
-others as possible.
-
-“The utmost freedom as to matter and style will be allowed, but nothing
-must be written calculated to wound the feelings of another.
-
-“Fictitious signatures, and a disguised hand, are allowable, when
-preferred.
-
-“All letters to be sealed.
-
-“The post office to be accessible to any member, at all times.”
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VII.
-
- THE RAIN POWER.
-
-
-AFTER the children had gone to school, the next day, Marcus made a
-letter-box, and fastened it against the wall, in the entry. While he was
-at work upon it, a young lady from another part of the town called in to
-invite the family to a husking party. On learning the design of the box,
-she solicited the privilege of inaugurating it, which was readily
-granted. So, begging a sheet or two of paper, she sat down and wrote
-notes of invitation to Kate, Otis and Ronald, and dropped them into the
-box.
-
-“Hurrah! here’s the post office box, and some letters in it!” exclaimed
-Ronald, when he came home from school in the afternoon.
-
-“I’m going to have the first one, let me see if I’m not,” cried Kate,
-rushing for the post office.
-
-“No, the first one is for me, but here’s one you may have,” replied
-Ronald, handing Kate the note directed to her.
-
-“Well, there’s one rule broken, the very first thing—it isn’t sealed,”
-said Kate; “and it is written with a lead pencil, too—I don’t think
-that’s fair.”
-
-She opened the billet, and read:—
-
- “Miss Jenny Marsh requests the pleasure of Miss Katharine
- Sedgwick’s company at a husking party on Friday evening.
-
- “Oct. 16th.”
-
-The notes addressed to Ronald and Otis were in the same form as Kate’s.
-The invitation was quite gratifying to all of the children, and the
-proposed party occupied a large share of their thoughts and tongues, for
-the rest of the day. Their ardor was somewhat dampened, however, by Mrs.
-Page, who told them she thought a storm was near, which might interfere
-with their arrangements.
-
-“I don’t see any signs of a storm—I think it looks real pleasant,” said
-Kate.
-
-“The water boiled away from the potatoes very fast, this noon, and that
-is a pretty good sign of rain,” replied Mrs. Page.
-
-“I don’t see what that has to do with rain,” said Ronald.
-
-“I can’t explain it very clearly,” replied Mrs. Page, “but I know it is
-so. I suppose there is something peculiar in the state of the
-atmosphere, just before a storm, which makes boiling water evaporate, or
-fly off into steam, more rapidly than at other times.”
-
-The sun rose clear, the next morning, and the children laughed at Mrs.
-Page for her prediction of rain. But in an hour or two, clouds began to
-gather, and early in the afternoon a heavy rain commenced. The children
-came home from school, wet, disappointed, and cross. Every thing seemed
-to go wrong with them, the rest of the day. Kate had wet her feet, and a
-grumbling tooth-ache admonished her that she had taken cold. Otis had
-left his new kite out doors, and found the paper upon it reduced to a
-handful of pulp, when he came home. The cows chose the luckless day to
-take a stroll into the neighbors’ enclosures, and led Ronald on a long
-and provoking tramp through the wet grass and soft, spongy lowlands, in
-search of them. Nor did Oscar escape his share of the ill-luck which
-seemed to brood over the household; for while milking, one of the cows,
-nettled perhaps by her long walk and the unpleasant state of the
-weather, gave him a slap across his eyes with her wet tail that almost
-took away his sight for a few minutes, at the same time leaving upon his
-face an embrocation that was not exactly calculated to soothe his
-ruffled feelings.
-
-“What is the matter? have you all got the blues?” inquired Marcus, at
-the tea-table, as he observed how gloomy and silent the younger portion
-of the family appeared.
-
-“O dear, I should think this horrid weather was enough to give any one
-the blues,” exclaimed Kate.
-
-“It doesn’t affect me very unpleasantly,” replied Marcus.
-
-“Well, you don’t care anything about the husking party, I suppose,” said
-Kate.
-
-“Oh, it’s the disappointment, and not the weather, that troubles you,”
-observed Marcus.
-
-“Not altogether that, but I think it’s too bad we can’t go to-night,”
-replied Kate.
-
-“It _is_ too bad that all the affairs of this world can’t be ordered to
-suit your convenience,” added Marcus.
-
-“No, I don’t wish that; but when I make up my mind to go any where, I do
-want to go,” said Kate.
-
-“Which is pretty much the same thing as wishing that Providence would
-lay all his plans with special reference to your private interests,
-without regard to the rest of the world.”
-
-Kate made no reply, but Ronald came to her rescue.
-
-“I don’t believe anybody wants it to rain, now,” he said; “the crops are
-all in, and what good-will it do?”
-
-“I think the owners of mills on the rivers could give you a good reason
-why it ought to rain now,” replied Marcus; “and perhaps we should find
-another reason at the bottom of our wells, after we have used up all the
-water, a few months hence.”
-
-“Well, then, I don’t think it need rain so much at a time,” said Ronald.
-“Just hear how it’s pouring down now, and it has been raining so almost
-all the afternoon.”
-
-“How much water do you suppose has fallen?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“About a foot, I guess,” replied Ronald.
-
-“A foot of rain!” exclaimed Marcus, with astonishment.
-
-“Well, half a foot, certainly,” said Ronald.
-
-“No; halve it again, and you will come nearer to the truth,” added
-Marcus.
-
-“What, only three inches? it’s more than that, I know,” said Ronald.
-
-“I doubt whether you have any idea how much three inches of rain is,”
-replied Marcus. “After tea we will go into a little calculation about
-it.”
-
-When the tea table was cleared away, Marcus proposed that all the
-children should provide themselves with paper or slates, and see if they
-could ascertain how much water had fallen in Highburg that day.
-
-“We will assume,” he said, “that three inches of rain has fallen, on a
-level, which I think may be very near the true quantity. The town
-contains about thirty square miles. Now, the first question is, how many
-hogsheads of water have fallen on this surface, to-day?”
-
-For a few moments nothing was heard but the clicking and scratching of
-pencils, and the rustling of the leaves of the arithmetic, by those who
-were not quite sure they knew the “tables.” Those who finished the work
-first were requested to keep silent till the others had got through.
-When all were ready, the answers were read off. The solutions of Marcus,
-Oscar and Kate agreed, and were assumed to be correct; while those of
-Ronald and Otis were different, and were voted incorrect. Marcus then
-proposed several other questions in regard to the rain, which led to a
-series of calculations. The children soon became quite interested in the
-problems, and were not a little surprised at the facts brought out.
-Marcus noted down the several answers, on a clean sheet of paper, and
-the following is a copy of the record:—
-
-
- “WHAT THE CLOUDS DID IN HALF A DAY.
-
-
-“The water that has fallen this afternoon and evening, in this town
-alone, would fill 24,826,775 hogsheads.
-
-“It would measure 209,088,000 cubic feet.
-
-“Its weight is 5,833,928 tons.
-
-“Were this water all in a pond, thirty feet deep, it would be sufficient
-to float 3,484 vessels, allowing 2,000 square feet to each, or about
-one-sixth of all the steam and sailing vessels of every class in the
-United States.
-
-“It would take a man 13,792 years to distribute this water, with a
-watering pot, supposing he distributed 6 hogsheads a day, and worked 300
-days in a year.
-
-“To distribute it in the same time as the clouds, half a day, would
-require 8,275,590 men, or more than twice as many as voted at the
-Presidential election of 1856, in the United States.
-
-“It would take $6,206,692 to pay these men for their services, at the
-rate of $1.50 per day.
-
-“If this water had all fallen to the earth in one solid mass, from a
-height of one mile, it would have struck the ground with a force of
-3,389,512,500 tons.”
-
-“There,” said Marcus, after reading aloud the foregoing record, “who
-would have imagined that the clouds were carrying on such an extensive
-business as that? Isn’t it wonderful? And then just think that this
-storm has extended over perhaps half of the United States. What a deluge
-of water must have fallen! And this, you must remember, is an account of
-only one storm—only three inches of rain, out of thirty or forty that we
-have every year.”
-
-“Why! do we have as much rain as that in a year?” inquired Kate.
-
-“Yes,” replied Marcus, “our average in this part of Vermont is, I
-believe, about thirty-two inches, including snow reduced to water. Along
-the sea coast they have more—in Boston, for instance, about forty
-inches. There are some parts of the world where they have almost as many
-feet of rain as we have inches, and nearly all of it falls in about two
-months of the year, too.”[4]
-
-Footnote 4:
-
- According to Prof. Guyot, rain falls at Paramaribo, in Dutch Guiana,
- to the amount of 229 inches, or 19 feet, annually. There is a place in
- Brazil where 276 inches, or 23 feet, have fallen in a year. But the
- greatest quantity ever observed is at an elevated point in British
- India, south of Bombay, where the enormous amount of 302 inches, or
- over 25 feet, has fallen in a year. At Cayenne, 21 inches of rain have
- been known to fall in a single day, or nearly as much as falls in a
- whole year in the northern latitudes. The annual average fall in
- tropical America, is 115 inches; in temperate America, 39 inches. The
- average for the entire surface of the globe is about five feet. These
- figures may afford the young arithmetician a basis for a variety of
- curious calculations, some rainy day, when he is at a loss for
- amusement, and is disposed to look a little more curiously into the
- wonderful results of “the rain power.”
-
-“What do people do there? I should think they would be all washed away,”
-said Kate.
-
-“No,” said Marcus, “it isn’t so bad as it seems. It is soon over with,
-and they have more pleasant days in the year than we do. I suppose they
-pity us because we have so many stormy days, and yet get so little rain
-after all. Besides, they know about when their rainy days are coming,
-and can be prepared for them.”
-
-“But, after all,” said Aunt Fanny, “I think our arrangement of the
-weather is best, if it does sometimes interfere with our plans. We
-generally have all the rain we want, and it is given to us a little at a
-time, as we need it. This is better for us and for vegetation than to
-have all our rain fall in two months of the year, and then to have three
-or four times as much as we really need.”
-
-“Then why doesn’t God make it rain so every where, if that way is best?”
-inquired Ronald.
-
-“For wise and good reasons, no doubt,” replied Aunt Fanny. “What is best
-for the temperate zones may not be best for the tropics. People who go
-from this latitude to tropical countries find the rainy season very
-unhealthy, but it is different with those who were born there.”
-
-“I suppose one object of these heavy rains between the tropics is to
-supply the great rivers of South America and Africa,” said Marcus. “We
-all know how Egypt is fertilized by the overflowing of the Nile; but the
-Nile would not overflow were it not for these immense rains in the
-country where it rises. So with the great rivers of South America, which
-overflow in the rainy season, and form inland seas, that serve as
-reservoirs in the dry months.”
-
-“And it is so with all the rivers in the world—they are nothing but
-drains to carry away the surplus rain-water,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-“Well,” said Marcus, glancing at the figures before him, “we have
-ascertained that nearly six million tons of water have fallen in our
-town to-day. Otis, can you explain how this immense body of water was
-raised into the air?”
-
-“I can explain it,” said Kate, seeing that her brother hesitated.
-
-“Let Otis try first,” replied Marcus.
-
-“Was it drawn up from the ocean by the sun?” inquired Otis.
-
-“Yes, that is the correct explanation,” continued Marcus. “Now, Kate,
-can you tell us any more about it?”
-
-“The heat of the sun,” said Kate, “causes a vapor to go up into the air
-from the ocean, and lakes, and rivers, and from everything that contains
-water. This is called evaporation. You can’t see this vapor, as it flies
-away into the air, but when the atmosphere grows cold, it forms clouds,
-and falls in rain.”
-
-“I should think the vapor would all dry up, and be lost, when the air is
-so warm,” said Ronald.
-
-“What do you mean by drying up?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“Why, you know,—I mean drying up,—I can’t think of any other way to
-explain it,” replied Ronald.
-
-“When the water in a puddle dries up,” said Marcus, “it flies into the
-air, in the form of a vapor, and that is evaporation. That is all the
-drying up there is about it. The air steals the water from the puddle,
-and then keeps it a close prisoner till the cold releases it. The water
-doesn’t dry up again in the air, but remains there. The warmer the air,
-the more water it will hold. In the tropics, where they have such fierce
-heats, the air is always full of moisture, and the plants draw it out by
-means of their large leaves, and so they manage to flourish the year
-round, although they have no rain or even clouds for months in
-succession. It is so with us, on a very sultry day,—there is more water
-than usual in the air, at such a time, although we cannot see it. Now,
-Kate, can you explain why this vapor which heat produces, flies away to
-the region of the clouds?”
-
-“Because it is lighter than the air,” replied Kate.
-
-“Right,” said Marcus.
-
-“You said you couldn’t see this moisture rise from the earth,” said Aunt
-Fanny, “but that is not always the case. We see it in our breath, on a
-cold day, when it looks like steam issuing from our mouths. I have seen
-a river steaming as though there were a fire under it, in a very cold
-day, before ice had formed over it. We see this process going on, too,
-in the vapors or fogs which often collect over ponds, and rivers, and
-the ocean. But commonly, as Kate says, we see nothing of these vapors
-until they are condensed into clouds by the cold air above, although
-they are continually flying off from our bodies, and from the ground,
-and every thing that grows in it. When we hang out our clothes to dry,
-after washing them, the water in them goes to help make clouds.”
-
-“There is one other agent in this business, that has not been
-mentioned,” said Marcus. “The sun draws the water, the atmosphere holds
-it as in a sponge, and the cold squeezes the sponge and returns the
-water to the earth. But the rain is not needed where it is first
-collected—it must be transported to distant parts of the earth; and how
-is this done?”
-
-“By the winds,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Yes,” resumed Marcus, “the winds are the great water-carriers, that
-distribute the rain over the earth. Here, then, we have the whole list
-of forces employed in this wonderful rain power, viz.:
-
-“1. The sun, to draw the water by its heat.
-
-“2. The atmosphere, to hold it.
-
-“3. The winds, to transport it over the continents.
-
-“4. The cold, to discharge it from the clouds when it has reached its
-destination.”[5]
-
-Footnote 5:
-
- Strictly speaking, these agents may be reduced to two; for the wind is
- only air in motion, and cold is not a substance, but merely the
- absence of heat, as darkness is the absence of light.
-
-“How does the cold make the rain fall?” inquired Ronald.
-
-“It contracts the air,” replied Marcus, “and the vapor is consequently
-condensed, or crowded together, so that its particles unite and form
-drops of rain, which are heavier than the air, and fall to the earth. As
-I said before, the atmosphere may be compared to a sponge, which holds a
-certain quantity of water, in minute particles. When the air sponge is
-contracted, these particles mingle together and run out, and then it
-rains.”
-
-“What a squeezing the sponge must have had to-day!” exclaimed Ronald.
-
-“When the vapor freezes before it falls to the earth,” said Kate, “it
-becomes snow; and when very cold and very hot and moist air come
-together, they make hail, or ice.”
-
-“I know a riddle about that,” said Ronald, repeating:—
-
- “My father is the Northern Wind,
- My mother’s name was Water:
- Old Parson Winter married them,
- And I’m their hopeful daughter.”
-
-“Did you know that snow-flakes are usually crystals of regular and
-beautiful forms?” inquired Marcus.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Kate and Oscar had read of this, but it was new to the other children.
-Marcus took down a volume from the library, and showed to them some
-drawings of these snow crystals, as seen under a microscope, a few of
-which are here given. There is an endless variety of these crystals, the
-most beautiful of which are found in the polar regions; but sometimes
-the flakes present no traces of crystallization.
-
-“My geography says it never rains in the Great Desert of Sahara; what is
-the reason of that?” inquired Ronald.
-
-“The Sahara,” replied Marcus, “is a vast ocean of sand, in the torrid
-zone. The air which arises from it is so scorching hot, that it burns
-up, as it were, the clouds of rain that blow towards it from the
-Mediterranean, as soon as they come within its reach. There are several
-other deserts in Africa, and in North and South America. Some of these
-are cut off from their supply of rain by mountains. When the clouds come
-in contact with a chain of high mountains, they are driven up their
-sides, into a colder region, and the vapor is pretty thoroughly wrung
-out of them. By the time the current of wind reaches the other side of
-the mountains, the clouds have all disappeared, and there is nothing
-left but a cold, dry air. That explains why it is that there is a desert
-region on the western coast of South America, on the very borders of the
-Pacific Ocean. The eastern sides of the Andes rob the clouds of all the
-rain brought from the Atlantic by the trade wind, and as the dry wind
-keeps on its course, the vapors of the Pacific are driven back to the
-ocean, before they can discharge themselves. Thus there is a paradise on
-one side of the mountains, and a desert on the other.”
-
-“Five minutes of nine,” said Mrs. Page, warningly.
-
-“Is it so late?” inquired Marcus. “Well, we will have a bit of poetry to
-wind up with, and I will appoint Kate to read it aloud, as it is a
-beautiful piece, and I’m afraid none of the rest of us would do it
-justice.”
-
-“O, you flatterer!” exclaimed Kate.
-
-“No, it isn’t flattery,—it _is_ a capital poem, if I’m any judge,” added
-Marcus, turning over the leaves of a book in search of the piece. “It’s
-by Bryant—ah, here it is. Now, Miss Kate, let us hear what the poet says
-about rain, so that we may have something pleasant to dream about, when
-we go to bed.”
-
-Kate took the book, and read in an admirable manner the following
-lines:—
-
-
- A RAIN DREAM.
-
- BY WILLIAM CULLEN BRYANT.
-
- THESE strifes, these tumults of the noisy world,
- Where Fraud, the coward, tracks his prey by stealth,
- And Strength, the ruffian, glories in his guilt,
- Oppress the heart with sadness. Oh, my friend,
- In what serener mood we look upon
- The gloomiest aspects of the elements
- Among the woods and fields! Let us awhile,
- As the slow wind is rolling up the storm,
- In fancy leave this maze of dusty streets,
- For ever shaken by the importunate jar
- Of commerce, and upon the darkening air
- Look from the shelter of our rural home.
-
- Who is not awed that listens to the Rain
- Sending his voice before him? Mighty Rain!
- The upland steeps are shrouded by their mists;
- The vales are gloomy with thy shade; the pools
- No longer glimmer, and the silvery streams
- Darken to veins of lead at thy approach.
- Oh, mighty Rain! already thou art here;
- And every roof is beaten by thy streams,
- And as thou passest, every glassy spring
- Grows rough, and every leaf in all the woods
- Is struck and quivers. All the hilltops slake
- Their thirst from thee; a thousand languishing fields,
- A thousand fainting gardens are refreshed;
- A thousand idle rivulets start to speed,
- And with the graver murmur of the storm
- Blend their light voices, as they hurry on.
-
- Thou fill’st the circle of the atmosphere
- Alone; there is no living thing abroad,
- No bird to wing the air, nor beast to walk
- The field; the squirrel in the forest seeks
- His hollow tree; the marmot of the field
- Has scampered to his den; the butterfly
- Hides under her broad leaf; the insect crowds
- That made the sunshine populous, lie close
- In their mysterious shelters, whence the sun
- Will summon them again. The mighty Rain
- Holds the vast empire of the sky alone.
-
- I shut my eyes, and see, as in a dream,
- The friendly clouds drop down spring violets
- And summer columbines, and all the flowers
- That tuft the woodland floor, or overarch
- The streamlet:—spiky grass for genial June,
- Brown harvests for the waiting husbandman,
- And for the woods a deluge of fresh leaves.
-
- I see these myriad drops that slake the dust,
- Gathered in glorious streams, or rolling blue
- In billows on the lake or on the deep,
- And bearing navies. I behold them change
- To threads of crystal as they sink in earth,
- And leave its stains behind, to rise again
- In pleasant nooks of verdure, where the child,
- Thirsty with play, in both his little hands
- Shall take the cool clear water, raising it
- To wet his pretty lips. To-morrow noon
- How proudly will the water-lily ride
- The brimming pool, o’erlooking, like a queen,
- Her circle of broad leaves. In lonely wastes,
- When next the sunshine makes them beautiful,
- Gay troops of butterflies shall light to drink
- At the replenished hollows of the rock.
-
- Now slowly falls the dull blank night, and still,
- All through the starless hours, the mighty Rain
- Smites with perpetual sound the forest leaves,
- And beats the matted grass, and still the earth
- Drinks the unstinted bounty of the clouds,
- Drinks for her cottage wells, her woodland brooks,
- Drinks for the springing trout, the toiling bee
- And brooding bird, drinks for her tender flowers,
- Tall oaks, and all the herbage of her hills.
-
- A melancholy sound is in the air,
- A deep sigh in the distance, a shrill wail
- Around my dwelling. ’Tis the wind of night;
- A lonely wanderer between earth and cloud,
- In the black shadow and the chilly mist,
- Along the streaming mountain side, and through
- The dripping woods, and o’er the plashy fields,
- Roaming and sorrowing still, like one who makes
- The journey of life alone, and nowhere meets
- A welcome or a friend, and still goes on
- In darkness. Yet awhile, a little while,
- And he shall toss the glittering leaves in play,
- And dally with the flowers, and gaily lift
- The slender herbs, pressed low by weight of rain,
- And drive, in joyous triumph, through the sky,
- White clouds, the laggard remnants of the storm.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VIII.
-
- INSUBORDINATION.
-
-
-IT was a cherished opinion with Marcus, that the best government for a
-child is that which teaches him to govern himself. He had derived this
-notion from his mother and aunt, both of whom, in all their intercourse
-with the young, had endeavored to keep it in mind. Marcus had put this
-theory in practice, to some extent, in the management of Ronald, and not
-without success. He anticipated a still greater triumph of this
-principle, however, with Oscar, whose age, and peculiar circumstances,
-seemed favorable to the experiment. Accordingly, instead of fixing metes
-and bounds for Oscar, and hampering him with set rules and commands,
-Marcus usually made known his wishes in the form of suggestions, advice,
-etc., taking it for granted that his will, plainly declared, would be
-regarded as law by his cousin. And so it was, for a few weeks. But
-gradually a change came over Oscar. He still attended faithfully to his
-work and studies, but began to manifest some impatience of control in
-other matters, and to take advantage of the liberty accorded to him. It
-was evident that he was falling into the notion that, aside from his
-stated work and his lessons, he could do pretty much as he pleased.
-
-Marcus noticed this change with no little anxiety and regret. He began
-to fear that he should be obliged to abandon the self-government theory,
-at least with Oscar. He kept his uneasiness to himself for a time, but
-as the evil manifestly increased, he at length broke the subject to his
-mother. It was at the close of a mild October afternoon. Supper was
-finished, the cows were milked, and as dusk approached, Oscar was seen
-to go over towards Mr. Hapley’s, and soon after re-appeared, with Sam,
-with whom he walked rapidly towards the village.
-
-“Mother, how do you think Oscar is getting on? Does he do as well as you
-expected?” inquired Marcus, as he entered the house, after observing his
-cousin’s movements.
-
-“Why, yes, I do not see but that he is doing pretty well,” replied Mrs.
-Page. “He works better than I supposed he would, and he gets his lessons
-well, too.”
-
-“But don’t you think he is a little too much inclined to have his own
-way?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“I have suspected it was so,” replied his mother; “but as you have had
-the principal management of him, you can judge best about that.”
-
-“For instance,” resumed Marcus, “I gave him to understand, when he first
-came here, that we didn’t want him to have anything to do with Sam
-Hapley.”
-
-“So did I,” interrupted Mrs. Page.
-
-“I never actually forbade him to associate with Sam,” continued Marcus,
-“but Oscar knows what he is, and he knows better than to go with him.
-And yet they are getting quite intimate. They were off together nearly
-all the afternoon, yesterday, hunting squirrels, as Oscar says; and this
-evening he has gone off with him again, notwithstanding I have told him
-two or three times that we all made it a rule not to be away from home
-after dark, except by special arrangement.”
-
-“I told him the same thing, the last evening he was out,” added Mrs.
-Page.
-
-“He has gone contrary to my wishes in several other matters,” resumed
-Marcus. “There’s tobacco, for one thing. I am satisfied that he is
-beginning to use it again; you know he formed the habit in Boston.”
-
-“Yes, but I hope he isn’t sliding into it again,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-“I think he is,” replied Marcus; “in fact, I am very certain he is, for
-I have smelt tobacco in his breath, several times. I have talked to him
-about the bad effects of tobacco, but didn’t let him know that I
-suspected he used it. Last Saturday I wrote something on the subject,
-and addressed it to him, and dropped it into our letter-box. I have got
-a copy of it—here it is.”
-
-Marcus took from his pocket a note, and read it aloud. As it may
-possibly interest some young reader who is trying to cultivate an
-acquaintance with tobacco, it is here given entire.
-
-
- “WHY I DON’T LIKE TOBACCO.
-
- “It does a man no good.
-
- “It is a powerful poison.
-
- “It is injurious to the health, and sometimes fatal to the life,
- especially of the young.
-
- “It weakens and injures the mind.
-
- “It begets an unnatural and burning thirst, which water will not
- quench, and thus prepares the way for the intoxicating cup.
-
- “It makes a man a slave to its use, so it is almost impossible
- for him to abandon it, after a few years.
-
- “It is offensive to all who do not use it.
-
- “It is a letter of introduction to bad associates.
-
- “The use of it is a filthy habit.
-
- “It is an expensive habit.
-
- “The only real advantage arising from the use of tobacco that I
- ever heard of happened to one of a party of sailors who were
- wrecked upon the Feejee islands. The savages killed and cooked
- them all, anticipating a delightful feast; but one of the tars
- tasted so strongly of tobacco, that they couldn’t eat him, and
- so he escaped a burial in their stomachs. As I intend to keep
- clear of cannibals, I don’t think this solitary fact offers me
- any inducement to steep and pickle myself in tobacco; therefore
- I intend to remain an
-
- =ANTI-PUFFER-AND-CHEWER.”=
-
-“I’m afraid it didn’t do much good,” resumed Marcus, somewhat sadly. “I
-smelt tobacco in his breath again to-day.”
-
-“Well,” said Mrs. Page, after a pause, “it will never do to let him go
-on in this way. I think it will be necessary to tell him very plainly
-and decidedly, that if he will not restrain himself, we must do it for
-him. One or the other he _must_ submit to, or go back to the Reform
-School, and the sooner he understands this, the better it will be for us
-all.”
-
-The entrance of the other children put a stop to the conversation; but
-Mrs. Page’s last remark confirmed the conclusion to which Marcus had
-already reluctantly arrived, and left him no longer in doubt as to the
-proper course to pursue.
-
-The lamps had been lit nearly an hour when Oscar came in, that evening.
-Nothing was said to him about his absence at the time; but the next day,
-taking him alone, Marcus talked long and earnestly to him about the
-course he was pursuing, and told him very decidedly that he could go on
-in this way no longer. “If we will not put ourselves under restraint,”
-he said, “others must do it for us. It is so in society, in the school,
-in the family, and everywhere else. The best form of government is
-self-government, and there is little need of any other, where that is;
-but if a man wont practise that, then the strong arm of the law must
-take him in hand, and compel him to do what he could have done much more
-pleasantly of his own free will.”
-
-Oscar attempted no justification of himself, neither did he acknowledge
-that he had done wrong. He listened in silence to Marcus, with an
-expression upon his countenance that at once puzzled and disappointed
-the latter. It were difficult to say whether shame, sadness or
-sullenness mingled most largely in the feelings mirrored in his face.
-
-There was a marked change in Oscar’s demeanor for several days after
-this event, though not precisely such a change as Marcus desired to see.
-He was silent, and carried a moody and sullen look upon his face, which
-did not escape the notice even of the children, although they knew
-nothing of its cause. Marcus treated him as kindly as ever; but how he
-longed to look into that troubled heart, and read the thoughts and
-feelings that were stirring its depths!
-
-About this time a new wonder suddenly appeared in town. The children
-came home from school with glowing accounts of a mammoth poster or
-show-bill exhibited outside of the post office, and covering a good
-portion of one side of the building. It was printed in all kinds of gay
-colors, and besprinkled from top to bottom with pictures, representing
-men, women and horses performing all manner of wonderful feats. They
-also brought home some small bills that had been scattered among the
-children. It was very seldom that a circus found its way into the small
-and secluded village of Highburg, but it was pretty evident that one was
-coming now, “for one day only,” and that the children were well-nigh
-bewitched with the highly-colored descriptions of the entertainment
-given by the great poster.
-
-There was a decided drawing down of faces, when Mrs. Page informed the
-excited group that she did not consider the circus a suitable place for
-them to visit, and could not consent to their going. Some of them were
-even disposed to question her position.
-
-“Why,” said Otis, “mother would let us go, if she were here.”
-
-“I do not know about that,” replied Mrs. Page; “and therefore I must act
-according to my own judgment.”
-
-“I don’t see what harm there could be in our going just once,” remarked
-Kate.
-
-“We ought not to go to an improper place even ‘just once,’” replied Mrs.
-Page. “Circus performers are generally a low class of men and women;
-their entertainments are low and degrading; and the dregs of the
-community usually gather around them. Those are the reasons why I do not
-wish you to go to such a place.”
-
-“You’ve been to the circus, haven’t you, Oscar?” inquired Ronald.
-
-“Yes, I have been a good many times,” replied Oscar.
-
-“And you agree with me, in your opinion of it, don’t you?” inquired Mrs.
-Page.
-
-“I don’t know—I always liked to go pretty well,” replied Oscar.
-
-This remark gave Mrs. Page much uneasiness, and she took the first
-opportunity, when Oscar was alone, to caution him against saying
-anything in the presence of the children that would excite their desires
-to go to the circus; a request which he promised to comply with.
-
-The circus paraded through the town on the appointed morning, with its
-wagon-load of noisy horn-blowers and drum-beaters, and its procession of
-fancy carriages and fine horses. The great tent was pitched, in the
-presence of all the idlers of the village, and in due time the door was
-opened to the public, and the performance commenced.
-
-Oscar finished his work and lessons as early as possible, in the
-afternoon, and then quietly slipped away from home, without the
-knowledge of any one. He turned his steps towards the village, where the
-circus was encamped. He wished merely to see what was going on, and did
-not intend to venture within the tent, since his aunt was so strongly
-opposed to such places of amusement. On reaching the circus grounds, he
-found a motley crowd assembled, composed chiefly of young men and
-half-grown boys, with a sprinkling of women and young children. There
-were few representatives of the better class of the population to be
-seen; but that marvel of laziness, old ’Siah Stebbins, was there,
-leaning against a fence, with his hands in his pockets; and so was
-Gavett, the man who once served three months in the county jail for
-stealing wood; and so were poor Silly John, the pauper, and Tim Hallard,
-the drunkard, and Dick Adams, the loafer _par excellence_, and little
-Bob Gooden, swaggering about with a cigar in his mouth, and Sam Hapley,
-swearing faster than ever, and his brother Henry, eagerly taking lessons
-in vice. All these were on the field, and others of like character. Some
-of the boys were mimicking performances they had witnessed inside the
-tent—turning somersets, standing on their hands, leaping, twisting their
-bodies into unaccountable shapes, etc.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Two donkeys belonging to the circus, mounted by boys, were driven around
-the field at a furious pace. A donkey being a novel sight to most of the
-people, the race attracted much attention from the outsiders, and served
-admirably to tole them into the enclosure—the object intended.
-
-As Oscar was sauntering about, he came unexpectedly upon Otis, who, with
-several others of the academy boys, hastened over to the circus, as soon
-as dismissed, “to see what was going on.”
-
-“What, are you here? I thought aunt told you to go right home when
-school was dismissed,” said Oscar.
-
-“I’m going right home,” replied Otis, adding, to himself, “I rather
-think I’ve just as good a right here as you have.”
-
-A moment after, as Otis was still standing by the side of Oscar, there
-came along a boy about the age of the latter, foppishly dressed, and
-with a bold face and a careless, swaggering air. His eyes met Oscar’s,
-and there was an instant recognition.
-
-“What, is that you, Alf!” exclaimed Oscar.
-
-“Halloo, Oscar, is that you!” cried the other.
-
-“How came _you_ here—do you belong to the circus?” inquired Oscar.
-
-“Yes,” replied the other; “but how came _you_ here? I thought you were
-in the house of correction, or some such place. How did you get out of
-that last scrape, say? O, I remember, they sent you to the Reform
-School, didn’t they?”
-
-Oscar, confused and distressed by this unexpected exposure, made signs
-to the other to desist, and attempted to turn off the affair as a joke.
-The strange remark of the strange boy, however, attracted the attention
-of Otis and several others of Oscar’s acquaintances who were standing
-by, and set them to wondering.
-
-The real name of Oscar’s new-found acquaintance was Alfred Walton, but
-he figured on the circus bills as “Master Paulding.” For years the two
-boys lived near each other, in Boston, and had been very intimate, their
-tastes and habits being much alike. The hotel and stables kept by
-Alfred’s step-father had been one of Oscar’s favorite resorts, and there
-he learned many of the bad lessons which he was now trying to forget. He
-had heard nothing from Alfred for a long time, but now learned from him
-that he quarrelled with his step-father and ran away from home five or
-six months previous, and being familiar with horses, had since followed
-the career of a circus rider.
-
-“And look here,” added Alfred, taking Oscar aside, “if you want a
-chance, I’ll speak a good word for you to the old man. I shouldn’t
-wonder if he would take you on trial—I bet I can put him up to it. We’ve
-got a good company—they are a high old set of fellows, I tell you.”
-
-“O no, I can’t join you—I’ve engaged to stay here two or three years,”
-replied Oscar.
-
-“Pooh, never mind that—you can slip off easily enough, just as I did,”
-said Alfred, who seemed to have no idea that any thing but force could
-hold a person to an engagement with which he was dissatisfied.
-
-“But I don’t want to slip off—I like here, well enough,” added Oscar.
-
-“Then you must have altered amazingly, if you can content yourself in
-such a horribly dull hole as this,” rejoined Alfred. “Why, I’d hang
-myself before I’d stay here three weeks. Come, you like to see the world
-as well as the rest of us do. Say you’ll go, and I’ll speak to the old
-man. He’ll give you twelve or fifteen dollars a month, as soon as you
-get broke in a little. That’s better than you can do here, I know. What
-do you get now, any how?”
-
-“I don’t have wages—father pays my board, and I’m going to school this
-winter,” replied Oscar.
-
-“Well, I should think you’d rather be your own man, and have a chance to
-see the world, than be cooped up in the woods here, two or three years,”
-added Alfred. “But come in, or you wont get a seat—performances begin in
-five minutes,” he added, drawing out a watch, to which was attached a
-flashy chain.
-
-“No, I didn’t intend to go in—the folks wont know where I am,” replied
-Oscar.
-
-“Yes, you are going in, too—it wont cost you anything—I’ll put you
-through,” said Alfred, pushing Oscar towards the door.
-
-Oscar was unable to withstand the pressing invitation of his old
-comrade, and suffered himself to be led into the enclosure, where he
-remained through the entire performance, which did not close until
-nearly dark. His prolonged absence was noticed at home, and led to
-unpleasant suspicions; but as Otis remained silent, for fear of exposing
-himself, nothing definite was known of his whereabouts.
-
-Oscar hurried home with many misgivings, after the exhibition had
-concluded, and was agreeably surprised to find the supper table still
-standing for him, and was yet more gratified that no questions were
-asked in relation to his absence. When he went up to bed, however,
-Marcus accompanied him to his chamber, and the following conversation
-took place:—
-
-“Oscar, where have you been this afternoon?”
-
-“Over to the circus.”
-
-“Did you go in, or only remain outside?”
-
-“I went in.”
-
-“I am very sorry to hear it, and surprised too. You knew it was much
-against our wishes, did you not?”
-
-Oscar made no reply.
-
-“You knew neither mother nor I would have consented to your going to
-such a place, did you not?” continued Marcus.
-
-“I supposed you wouldn’t.”
-
-“Then why did you go? Do you intend to pay any regard to our wishes, or
-do you mean to have your own way in everything?”
-
-Oscar remained silent.
-
-“Do you remember what I said to you a few days ago, about your
-behavior?”
-
-“Yes, sir.”
-
-“Well, I suppose all it is necessary for me to say now, is, that I
-intend to abide strictly by what I said at that time. Your going to the
-circus was to all intents an act of wilful disobedience, and as a
-punishment, I shall have to declare you a prisoner for the rest of the
-week.”
-
-Oscar did not appear much pleased with this announcement, and something
-like an expression of anger flitted across his countenance, but he made
-no reply.
-
-“I do not intend to make you a _close_ prisoner,” continued Marcus. “I
-shall let you go on parole, if you agree to that arrangement. I suppose
-you know what that means.”
-
-“It means that I can go at large, if I’ll agree not to go off,” said
-Oscar.
-
-“Yes,” replied Marcus, “you have the idea. When a prisoner of war is
-released on parole, he gives his word of honor that he will not go
-beyond certain fixed limits, and that he will not take part in any
-hostile act. As we are not at war, we can dispense with the latter part
-of the bargain. All I shall require is, that you will give me your word
-of honor not to go beyond certain limits I shall name, without special
-leave from me, during the rest of this week. You can have your choice
-between this, and being kept a close prisoner in the house. Which do you
-choose?”
-
-“To go on parole.”
-
-“And do you give your word of honor?”
-
-“Yes, sir.”
-
-“Well, you may consider yourself on parole, from this time,” added
-Marcus, and he mentioned the limits beyond which he was not to pass.
-
-“Supposing I should go beyond the limits—what then?” inquired Oscar, who
-was beginning to regard the deprivation with curiosity rather than
-displeasure.
-
-“I can suppose no such thing,” replied Marcus. “The parole system takes
-it for granted that when a man deliberately gives his word of honor that
-he will do a certain thing, he will regard his promise as sacred and
-inviolable, come what may. If it were not so, there would be an end to
-the parole, very quick. I believe it seldom happens that a man is found
-base enough to abuse the parole. I read an account a few days ago,
-however, in the Life of Napoleon, of some soldiers who broke their
-parole, but they were Turks. During one of Napoleon’s campaigns in
-Syria, he captured ten or twelve hundred Turkish troops, and released
-them on parole. Soon after, they were again taken prisoners, while
-defending a city. A council of war was held, and after considering the
-matter three days, it was unanimously decided that the prisoners must
-die. Accordingly they were led out in small groups and shot; and it is
-said that the pyramid of their bones remains in the desert to this day.
-But this is a very rare case, and I shall take it for granted that you
-will keep your promise. In fact, I have so little doubt of it, that I
-shall not watch you in the least, nor take any pains to find out where
-you go. If you go outside of the limits, I probably shall not know it,
-unless I discover it accidentally.”
-
-“Well, you may depend on my keeping within the bounds, unless I should
-forget myself,” replied Oscar.
-
-Oscar faithfully kept his parole, through the two remaining days of the
-week. Under the kind and forbearing yet firm treatment he had received
-from Marcus, his feelings now began to relent, somewhat, and, despite
-the mitigating circumstances in the case, which he had not explained to
-any one, he felt some reproaches of conscience for the course he had
-pursued. On Saturday afternoon, he half resolved to acknowledge his
-fault to Marcus, freely and frankly, and ask forgiveness; but when the
-opportunity came to do so, a false pride overcame the better promptings
-of his heart, and stifled the words that were trembling on his lips. The
-quick eye of Marcus, however, perceived that a change had been wrought
-in the feelings of his pupil, and greatly did he rejoice at it.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IX.
-
- CORRESPONDENCE.
-
-
-THE “Excelsior Letter-writing Society” had now been in operation several
-weeks, and had thus far proved a popular and useful institution. The
-letter-box was regularly patronized by all its members, but one of them
-having brought upon himself the dire penalty of exclusion from it, and
-he for only a single day. I do not intend to expose the delinquent, but
-justice requires me to say it was neither Oscar nor Ronald. The letters
-which passed through the domestic post office were as various as the
-writers and their moods. Some were long, and some brief; some serious,
-and others funny. There were letters advisory, admonitory, commendatory,
-critical, mysterious, romantic, and quizzical; but none that were
-disrespectful or unkind, care having been taken to guard against these
-faults.
-
-A few days after the events narrated in the preceding chapter, Marcus
-received a letter which afforded him peculiar gratification. It was from
-Oscar, and was as follows:
-
- “Nov. 6th, 185—.
-
- “DEAR MARCUS,—I think you would not have blamed me so much as
- you did for going to the circus, last Thursday, if you had known
- all the circumstances. I did not intend to go inside, when I
- went over to the village; but I met a boy there named Alfred
- Walton, that I used to be very intimate with in Boston. He
- belongs to the company, and tried to persuade me to join them,
- but I told him I did not wish to. Then he insisted upon my going
- in, and would not take no for an answer. He got me inside the
- tent, before I could get away from him. He told the doorkeeper I
- was his friend, and he let me in without paying. I am very sorry
- I went near the circus at all; but I could not very well help
- going in, after I saw Alfred.
-
- “I must tell you about another thing that has troubled me a good
- deal. Alfred was mean or thoughtless enough to plague me about
- being sentenced to the Reform School, right before Otis and
- several other boys that know me. I turned it off as well as I
- could, but Otis has spoken to me about it since, and I am afraid
- he thinks there is something in it. I had to tell him what I
- suppose some people would call ‘a white lie,’ to get rid of him.
- I don’t see how I can keep the thing from coming out, unless I
- lie right up and down about it.
-
- “I have thought much lately of what you said about
- self-government. I like your ideas, and I mean to try to put
- them in practice. If you could give me any hints that would help
- me in making the experiment, I should be very thankful.
-
- “Yours truly, OSCAR.”
-
-To this letter, Marcus replied as follows, at his earliest convenience:
-
- “HIGHBURG, Nov. 7, 185—.
-
- “DEAR COUSIN OSCAR,—I have not received a more welcome letter
- for many a day, than yours of yesterday. The extenuating
- circumstances you mention, in regard to your visit to the
- circus, change my opinion of that act very much, as you may well
- suppose; for I thought you went deliberately, and of your own
- choice. You ought to have explained this before, and I wonder
- that you did not. Still, I do not think this plea wholly excuses
- you, unless you were actually _forced_ in, which I suppose you
- do not pretend; and even in that case, you need not have
- remained in, after Alfred left you. So I must still believe that
- you were to some extent blameworthy, first, for putting yourself
- in the way of temptation by going to the circus grounds; and
- secondly, for yielding to the coaxings of your old friend. I am
- glad you see your error, and are sorry for it.
-
- “As to keeping certain parts of your history secret, I do not
- think it a matter of so much importance as you probably do. If
- you behave well now, and for the future, these errors will soon
- be forgotten; but if they cannot be concealed without falsehood,
- I would not attempt to hide them. I would rather acknowledge the
- facts to Otis, and appeal to his honor and generosity to keep
- them secret. I think he would not betray you.
-
- “I am rejoiced to learn that you mean to govern yourself. I wish
- I could help you in this noble work. You must imagine yourself a
- governor, appointed over a province. Your subjects are the
- various powers of your mind, the qualities of your heart, your
- habits, tastes, affections, etc. It is taken for granted that
- you know something of the law you are to administer. The Bible
- and your conscience will give you all the instruction you need
- on this point. The next thing to be done, is to make yourself
- thoroughly acquainted with the people of your little province.
- Who are they? What is their character? Are they a hard set to
- govern, or the contrary? How can you best manage them? This is
- _self-examination_, and without it, we can neither know
- ourselves, nor govern ourselves. Well, after we understand
- pretty well what kind of subjects we have got to deal with, the
- next thing is to apply the law to them, firmly, vigorously, with
- unwearied watchfulness, and with a determination to conquer
- them. We must persevere in this until we accomplish our purpose,
- and our rule in our own little household is securely
- established.
-
- “Let me give you a familiar illustration. In looking over the
- little inner kingdom I am called to rule, we will suppose that I
- find one subject that has proved quite troublesome. His real
- name is Laziness, but we will call him by his polite name, Mr.
- Ease. I can see very plainly, as I examine the past, that I owe
- to him a great many wasted hours and opportunities, and a great
- many good things _not_ done. Well, one cold winter morning, I
- astonish Mr. Ease very much by informing him, before my eyes are
- fairly open, that I intend to rise instanter. This is something
- very strange, and he begins to expostulate, and to plead for a
- few moments more in the warm bed; but before he can finish his
- plea, I am up, and half dressed. ‘You are not going to make the
- fire—your mother can do that,’ says Ease, as I go into the
- kitchen; ‘But I _am_ going to make it,’ I reply, and at it I go,
- at once. Then I go out to the barn, and see to the stock; but
- before the morning work is half done, Mr. Ease says, in his
- blandest voice, ‘Come, go into the house, and warm yourself, and
- get ready for breakfast. This is cold work—let the boys finish
- it.’ I pay no attention to his advice, but keep about my work
- until it is done, and have all the better appetite for my
- breakfast, for doing so. After that meal, Mr. Ease kindly
- reminds me that I have not read the magazine that came
- yesterday, and suggests that I might spend an hour very
- comfortably with it in the chimney corner, on such a cold
- morning. But I tell him it is a clear, bright day, and there is
- plenty of work to do, and at it I go, without further parley.
- After dinner, Mr. Ease again intrudes himself, in his blandest
- way. ‘Come,’ he says, ‘you’ve worked hard all the forenoon, now
- put the horse into the sleigh and have a ride; the afternoon is
- fine, and the sleighing excellent.’ ‘Ah, yes, the sleighing _is_
- good,’ I reply; ‘I think I’ll improve it by hauling a load or
- two of wood, and take the ride some other time.’
-
- “So I keep ‘snubbing’ this Mr. Ease, as coolly as you please,
- day after day. Finding he is losing his power over me, he grows
- shy and glum, and slinks away, and at length I hear but very
- little from him. He is conquered. And if I find any other
- upstarts or usurpers in my dominions, I serve them in the same
- way. If I can’t snub them into submission, as I did Mr. Ease, I
- just seize them firmly by the throat, and choke them down. That
- is the way I served Mr. Anger.
-
- “To do all this, you must rely upon principle, not impulse. You
- must form a fixed purpose to govern yourself, and adhere to it,
- through thick and thin. You must also be willing to submit to
- some self-denial and sacrifice. Don’t be frightened at those
- words. They look like bugbears, but after all, they are at the
- root of all our happiness. Almost our first and last experience
- of life is that of desires denied. From infancy to old age, we
- are daily and almost hourly called to sacrifice a lesser for a
- greater good; and until we yield cheerfully to this great law,
- we have not learned to live, nor have we known true happiness.
- Self-indulgence and ease make puny, vicious and unhappy men.
- Self-control and self-denial make strong and noble souls—the
- master spirits that rule the world.
-
- “I will add but one thought more. However painful the effort at
- self-government may be, at first, the power of habit will
- gradually render the work easy, until at length it will actually
- become a pleasure.
-
- “Wishing you much success in your good purpose, I remain
-
- “Your affectionate cousin,
- “MARCUS.”
-
-It was not often that so long and formal a letter as this found its way
-into the family post office. Most of the missives exchanged between the
-members of the society, were brief notes, a few specimens of which are
-given:
-
- “MARCUS PAGE, ESQ.—Dear Sir,—I propose that we take the
- hay-cart, Saturday afternoon, and all hands go off after nuts.
- What say you to the plan?
-
- “Yours truly, OTIS.
- “Oct. 25th.”
-
- “O, fie, Ronald! how could you say, ‘I intended to have wrote!’
- It is perfectly barbarous. ‘I intended to have written,’ is what
- you should have said. ‘I got my lessons’ is bad, too; you mean
- you _learned_ your lessons. Please put two t’s in regretted,
- next time, and write Friday with a capital F. But I wont play
- the critic any more, just now, for fear you might banish from
- your list of correspondents
-
- “Your faithful friend, KATE.
- “Nov. 2.”
-
-To this note Kate received the following reply, the next day:
-
- “O, fie, Kate! how could you say, ‘I intended to have written!’
- It is perfectly barbarous. ‘I intended to _write_’ is what you
- should have said. If you don’t believe me, I can show you the
- rule in the grammar. Don’t be afraid to ‘play the critic’—I
- _like_ to have you do it!
-
- “Yours in fun, RON.
- “Nov. 3.”
-
-Ronald was not accustomed to take things upon trust, especially from one
-near his own age, when he could conveniently verify their truth for
-himself. This habit led him to investigate the blunders pointed out by
-Kate, and the result was, that he was able to convict his critic of a
-serious grammatical error—a “turning of the tables” which he enjoyed
-with a roguish zest. Kate did not need to consult the grammar, to
-satisfy herself in regard to the error; for she at once recalled to mind
-the rule she had learned: “All verbs expressive of hope, desire,
-intention, or command, must invariably be followed by the present, and
-not the perfect of the infinitive.”
-
-The post office sometimes served as a medium through which an uneasy
-conscience sought relief, as in the following:—
-
- “HIGHBURG, Oct. 26th.
-
- “DEAR MISS LEE,—I don’t know what you think of me, for speaking
- to you so rudely, last evening. I was only in fun, of course,
- but I suppose I carried it too far. I was sorry for it a minute
- after. I hope you will excuse me, this time, and I will be more
- careful in future.
-
- “Ever yours,
-
- KATE.”
-
-Kate, in a merry mood, had rallied Miss Lee upon her state of
-singleness, applying to her the epithet, “old maid,” and using other
-expressions that were not quite proper, considering the differences
-between their ages; hence this apology. Miss Lee, it should be added,
-was loved and esteemed none the less by those who knew her, because of
-the peculiarity of which Kate made sport. She was an especial favorite
-with the children of the family, and her pleasant words and looks, her
-obliging disposition, her sound advice, her clear explanations of school
-lesson and other mysteries, her inexhaustible fund of anecdote and
-story, and not least, the beautiful productions of her pencil and brush,
-constituted an attraction which all felt and acknowledged. She had spent
-many years in teaching, but had now relinquished the profession. Her
-services as an artist were highly appreciated by the children, who
-coaxed many a pretty drawing or painting from her portfolio. Her letters
-were eagerly sought for, as they sometimes contained the fruits of her
-pencil, as well as of her pen. Here is one of them:—
-
- “Nov. 4.
-
- “DEAR OTIS,—Enclosed I send the drawing of the four dogs, which
- you wished me to make for your little brother. When you forward
- it to him, you had better call his attention to the dotted
- lines, otherwise he might not understand the design of the
- picture. If he should get a piece of tracing paper, he might
- easily make for himself a separate copy of each of the four
- dogs. I have not had a letter from you yet. Won’t my turn come
- soon?
-
- “Your friend sincere,
-
- “FANNY.”
-
-Here is a copy of the picture enclosed in this letter:
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Thus did the domestic post office serve alike to entertain the younger
-members of the family, and to educate their minds and hearts. Its
-novelty had not yet begun to wear off, and it was regarded by all as one
-of the established institutions of the family.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER X.
-
- A WOUNDED CONSCIENCE.
-
-
-MRS. PAGE and Marcus were riding in the outskirts of the town, one
-afternoon, when they stopped a few moments at the door of an
-acquaintance—a lady named Blake. She was a widow, and had a large family
-of children. One of them, a girl named Ellen, was standing near the
-horse, when her mother remarked—
-
-“I wish I could find a place for Ellen, this winter. If she couldn’t
-earn anything more than her board, it would be better than nothing.”
-
-“How old are you, Ellen?” inquired Marcus.
-
-“Thirteen last spring,” replied the girl.
-
-“Do you want to go away to live?” asked Mrs. Page.
-
-“I don’t know,” replied Ellen, with considerable hesitation.
-
-“No, she would rather stay at home,” interposed her mother; “but I think
-she is getting old enough to do something for herself. She could make
-herself quite useful to any one, if she tried.”
-
-“So I should suppose,” said Mrs. Page. “Perhaps I can think of some one
-who would like to take her this winter—I will let you know, if I do.”
-
-“Mother,” said Marcus, on their way home, “wouldn’t it be a good plan
-for you to take Ellen to help you, this winter? Our family is so large,
-now, that I think you and Aunt Fanny ought to have some help. Ellen
-could make the beds, and set the table, and wash the dishes, and do a
-good deal of other work. Mrs. Lane says she is quite handy about
-housework. She had the whole management of the family affairs nearly a
-fortnight, last summer, when her mother was sick.”
-
-Mrs. Page did not then make any very definite reply to this proposition,
-although the same idea had occurred to herself, when Mrs. Blake spoke of
-Ellen. After thinking and talking the matter over for a few days, and
-making the necessary inquiries about Ellen, it was decided that she
-might come to live with them for the winter, if she chose. Marcus was
-accordingly despatched to inform Mrs. Blake of the opening they had made
-for her daughter. The offer was gratefully accepted, especially as
-Marcus assured her that Ellen would probably have time and facilities
-for continuing her studies, the same as if she were attending school. It
-was agreed that she should be in readiness for her new home, the next
-week.
-
-The district school which Ronald attended was now near the end of the
-fall term. It was to close with a public examination and exhibition, for
-which considerable preparation had been made. Several prizes were to be
-awarded, for good behavior and scholarship. Among others, a favorite
-book was to be given to the boy who showed the neatest kept and best
-executed writing-book at the close of the term. A similar prize was
-offered to the girls, and another to the scholar whose book showed the
-greatest improvement, during the term. For the first-named prize Ronald
-had been a candidate, until the unfortunate blotting of his book, which
-threw him out of the contest. On the day before the exhibition, as the
-teacher was making a final examination of the writing-books, she was
-surprised and vexed to observe several fresh blots upon the book which
-she supposed would take the prize. It belonged to Lewis Daniels, a boy
-who sat by the side of Ronald. He denied all knowledge of the matter,
-however, and could hardly believe that it was his book that was
-disfigured, until he had seen it for himself. When told that these blots
-had probably lost him the prize, he did not manifest much emotion; and,
-indeed, he seemed to take the affair so coolly, from first to last, that
-Mrs. Benham, the teacher, did not know what to think of it. She at
-length determined to have some further conversation with him on the
-subject, and with this purpose detained him after school was dismissed.
-
-“Lewis,” she said, when they were alone, “to-morrow is probably the last
-day that I shall ever be your teacher. I want to part pleasantly with
-all my scholars, and to carry away agreeable recollections of them. But
-I feel a little troubled about you. I am afraid you have not told me the
-truth about your writing-book, and I can’t bear to think you are going
-to bid me good-by with a falsehood in your mouth. Now if you have tried
-to deceive me, I want you to confess it all, and be forgiven, for I
-shall not punish you, as we are about to separate.”
-
-Lewis colored deeply, and replied in a husky voice—
-
-“I told you all I knew about it.”
-
-“But you told me nothing about it,” replied Mrs. Benham, whose
-suspicions were further excited by this reply.
-
-“I know nothing about it,” added Lewis.
-
-“Lewis Daniels,” continued the teacher, mildly, after a slight pause,
-“can you look me calmly in the eye, and say that? No, I knew you could
-not. You cannot act out such a black falsehood. Your manner betrays you.
-Now will you acknowledge the whole truth?”
-
-“I blotted the book myself” said Lewis, bursting into tears.
-
-“How did it happen?” inquired Mrs. Benham.
-
-“I did it on purpose, because I didn’t want to take the prize,” sobbed
-the boy.
-
-“That is a very singular reason—I hope you will not tell me any more
-untruths about the matter,” replied the teacher, mildly, a shade of
-anxiety flitting across her face.
-
-“It is nothing but the truth, as true as I’m alive,” continued Lewis; “I
-didn’t want to get the prize away from Ronald—that’s why I did it.”
-
-“That was very generous in you, if you are telling the truth,” replied
-the teacher; “but was it just to yourself? If you fairly earned the
-prize, why should you give it up to another?”
-
-“I didn’t earn it fairly,” replied Lewis, amid fresh tears and sobs. “I
-thought he would get the prize, and so I blotted his book one morning,
-before he got to school. You punished him for it—don’t you remember?”
-
-Mrs. Benham did remember, and it would be hard to say whether she or her
-conscience-stricken pupil suffered most at the recollection of the
-trying scenes thus recalled, the mystery of which was now unfolded to
-her. It was not strange that her own tears mingled with those of the
-sobbing boy, for she felt that she too had erred, though she hoped
-innocently.
-
-“My poor boy, you have been most severely punished for your fault,” at
-length resumed Mrs. Benham. “Conscience is a stern judge. ‘A wounded
-spirit who can bear?’”
-
-“Yes, ma’am, when you punished Ronald, and when he got up before the
-school and asked your pardon”—but the penitent boy’s emotions were too
-deep to allow him to finish the sentence.
-
-“And I suppose you have been suffering more or less from this concealed
-sin, every day since, now about six weeks,” said Mrs. Benham.
-
-“Yes, ma’am,” replied Lewis. “I felt so mean that I used to keep out of
-Ronald’s way as much as I could. I hated to see him. Then I tried to
-treat him as well as I could, but that didn’t help me much. So I made up
-my mind at last that I would serve my writing-book the same way that I
-served his.”
-
-“And did you expect to gain peace of mind in this way—by committing
-another fault, and covering it over with a falsehood?” inquired the
-teacher. “Your last error was almost as bad as the first. I hope this
-will be a lesson to you, as long as you live. By delaying this
-confession so many weeks, you have caused yourself a great deal of
-suffering, and got further into trouble than you were at first. But as I
-promised, I cheerfully forgive all, so far as it concerns me. Do you
-think there is any one else whose forgiveness you ought to seek?”
-
-“I suppose I ought to tell Ronald about it, and ask him to forgive me,”
-replied Lewis.
-
-“I should do so, most certainly,” said the teacher; “and you had better
-see him to-night, if possible, as you may not have an opportunity to
-speak with him to-morrow. Is there any one else whose forgiveness you
-propose to seek?”
-
-“I don’t know,” replied Lewis, in doubt.
-
-“Don’t you think your Heavenly Father will expect you to confess this
-matter to him, and ask his forgiveness?” inquired the teacher. “You have
-sinned against him quite as much as against Ronald or me. Are you in the
-habit of praying to him?”
-
-“No, ma’am—only I say a hymn sometimes, when I go to bed,” replied
-Lewis.
-
-“I am sorry you do not pray to him,” resumed the teacher. “He made you,
-and he gives you every good thing you receive, and when you do wrong, he
-is grieved. I should think you would thank him every day for the
-blessings he gives, and ask him for those things you need; and when you
-displease him, I wonder how you can help asking him to forgive you, and
-to keep you from falling into sin again. Will you join with me, now, in
-seeking his forgiveness?”
-
-Lewis bowed assent, and knelt down with his teacher, who offered a brief
-and fervent prayer in his behalf, that his sins might be truly repented
-of and forgiven, and that he might be kept from transgression hereafter.
-She then urged him to seek the divine forgiveness, in secret prayer at
-home, and with a kindly good-night, they separated.
-
-Lewis went directly to Mrs. Page’s, where he found Ronald, in company
-with the other children. After a little while, he managed to draw him
-aside, saying—
-
-“Come out this way, Ronald—I’ve got something to tell you.”
-
-“Well, tell away,” replied Ronald.
-
-“You know the teacher found some blots on my writing-book, this
-afternoon?”
-
-“Yes—how came they there?”
-
-“I blotted it myself.”
-
-“You did? Then you told a whopper.”
-
-“I did it purposely, too.”
-
-“Then you was a fool. Why, you might have taken the prize, if you hadn’t
-done it.”
-
-“But I did something worse than that.”
-
-“What was it?”
-
-“I blotted your book the other day, so I might make sure of the prize.”
-
-“You mean——” but the hasty reply was instantly checked by a glance at
-the sorrowful face before him, and Ronald stood silent and ashamed.
-
-“I’m sorry for it, and I hope you will forgive me,” added Lewis, the
-tears gathering in his eyes. “I told the teacher all about it, and she
-has forgiven me.”
-
-“O yes, I’ll forgive you, too, seeing you have owned up of your own
-accord.”
-
-“I’ve suffered enough for it to be forgiven, at any rate.”
-
-“You blotted your book so as to be even with me? Well, that was doing
-the handsome thing, any way. You might have kept dark, and got the
-prize, just as easy as not. I never supposed any one blotted my book on
-purpose; I thought it was an accident.”
-
-Lewis repeated his expressions of sorrow for his offence, and received
-renewed assurances of forgiveness. He then returned home with a lighter
-heart than he had known for many a day.
-
-The examination of the school, the next day, passed off very
-successfully. A goodly company of visitors was present, the order and
-general behavior of the scholars were excellent, the classes appeared
-well, and the singing and declamations were attractive. Ronald,
-unexpectedly to himself, bore off two of the honors—one for general
-progress in his studies, and the other for the neatest writing-book.
-Both prizes were books adapted to his age. As the writing prize was
-handed to him, the committee-man who distributed the gifts, remarked
-that his book was somewhat blotted; but as it had been ascertained that
-it was through no fault of his, and as, saving this fault, his book
-stood the highest, they had decided to award him the prize. So ended
-Ronald’s last day at the district school. He was now to enter the
-academy.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XI.
-
- IN-DOOR AMUSEMENTS.
-
-
-THE fall term of the academy closed a few days after the district
-school, and Oscar, also, was released from his lessons, so that all the
-young folks were now having a short vacation. Kate and Otis, however,
-were greatly disappointed, on receiving a letter from their father, a
-few days before the term closed, stating that they were to remain in
-Highburg through the vacation, instead of visiting their home. The
-serious illness of their little sister was the reason given for this new
-arrangement, and as a partial offset to the disappointment, their
-parents promised to make them a brief visit at the earliest possible
-day.
-
-The weather was now cold, and often dull or stormy, rendering out-door
-amusements unpleasant, and much of the time impracticable. Marcus,
-though busily engaged in finishing up his work for the winter, was
-untiring in his efforts to relieve the disappointment of Kate and Otis,
-by finding amusements for them and the other children. When the weather
-would not admit of a ride in the wagon, an excursion in the woods, or a
-frolic in the fields and on the hill-sides, he was always ready with
-some game or amusement that could be played in the house or barn. The
-long evenings, too, were beguiled with innocent and often instructive
-diversions, and when the wind raved loudest without, there were no
-gloomy hearts within.
-
-“I’m going to propose a new play,” said Marcus, one evening, as the
-little party gathered around the table; “it is called _Conglomeration_.”
-
-“Conglomeration! I hope the play is as funny as the name,” said Kate.
-
-“We shall see,” observed Marcus, as he distributed some slips of paper
-among the children. “Now I want each of you to write five words on
-separate pieces of paper, and throw them all in a heap on the middle of
-the table. You can select any words you choose.”
-
-When all had written, Marcus mixed together the bits of paper, and then
-directed each one to take five words from the heap, as they happened to
-come, and to write one or more sentences containing those words in the
-order in which they were drawn from the pile.
-
-There was a good deal of merriment among the party, as they glanced at
-the slips, and perceived what a droll “conglomeration” they had got to
-weave together. Here are some specimens of them:—
-
- KATE’S. ROLAND’S. OSCAR’S. OTIS’S.
- Poetry, Spider, Shoot, Funny,
- Physic, Book, Gravy, Toothache,
- Should, Sober, Girl, Jewsharp,
- Ronald, Cannot, Onions, Going,
- Broomstick Turkey. Sublime. Jericho.
-
-No one thought of saying “I can’t,” however, and in a few minutes, after
-some rubbing of foreheads and scratching of heads, the last of the
-sentences was completed.
-
-“Now each one may read his own sentence aloud, emphasizing the words
-that were given. Otis, we will begin with you.”
-
-Otis read:—
-
- “It would be _funny_ if the _toothache_ could be cured with a
- _jewsharp_, but I am not _going_ to _Jericho_ to find out about
- it.”
-
-“No, I should not,” said Marcus; “now, Ronald, what have you written?”
-
-Ronald then read:—
-
- “The _spider_ may not care anything about a _book_, but a
- _sober_ boy like me _cannot_ help loving roast _turkey_.”
-
-“A _sober_ boy, I should think!” said Kate.
-
-“Don’t interrupt us,” said Marcus; “now, what’s yours, Oscar?”
-
-“I couldn’t make much out of my list,” remarked Oscar, and after a
-moment’s hesitation, he read:—
-
- “If I could _shoot_ a rabbit, I would make _gravy_ of him; and
- then the _girl_ should serve him up with _onions_, in the most
- _sublime_ style.”
-
-“Why, I bet I could do better than that,” exclaimed Ronald.
-
-“Stop, stop, Ronald!” cried Marcus; “where are your manners?”
-
-“Something came into my head, just then, and I spoke before I thought,”
-replied the impulsive boy, somewhat abashed.
-
-“Let him try my list—I don’t care if he does beat me,” said Oscar, good
-naturedly.
-
-“No,” replied Marcus, “I think he had better not—you have done well
-enough yourself. Now, Kate, we will hear yours.”
-
-Kate then read:—
-
- “I don’t care much about _poetry_, and I hate _physic_, but I
- _should_ like to hit _Ronald_ with a _broomstick_.”
-
-“You’d better try it!” cried Ronald, jumping into an attitude of
-self-defence, as the merry laugh rang over the house.
-
-Sentences were also read by Marcus and Ellen Blake, who had now become
-an inmate of the house. Another round was then proposed with a larger
-list of words; and now that the character of the play was better
-understood, they found it even more amusing than at first.
-
-The “Hay-Mow Debating Society,” so named from the place in which it
-usually held its meetings, was established at the commencement of the
-vacation, and met once or twice a week until the new term commenced. All
-the children belonged to it, and all were required to take part in the
-discussions. Subjects were assigned beforehand, and disputants appointed
-for each side, so that all were prepared to say something. The questions
-discussed were not perhaps so important as those which sometimes agitate
-senates and parliaments, but they were such as the young debaters could
-grasp, and feel an interest in. Marcus gave out for the first discussion
-the proposition, “Education is of more value to a man than wealth.” The
-manner in which this grave theme was handled, induced him to throw away
-his list of propositions for discussion, and to make a new set, of a
-very different order. Some of these were as follows: “Which is
-preferable, summer or winter?” “Which is pleasanter, a residence on a
-hill, or in a valley?” “Which is most desirable, a half holiday,
-Wednesday and Saturday afternoons, or a whole holiday, every Saturday?”
-“Who enjoy themselves most, boys or girls?” Though these may look like
-trivial questions, they served to wake up the ideas of the young people,
-and sometimes the debates became quite exciting, occasionally taking a
-very amusing turn.
-
-One evening, as riddles, puzzles, etc., were in the ascendant, Ellen
-read the following from a scrap of paper:—
-
- “There was a man of Adam’s race,
- Who had a certain dwelling place;
- He had a house well covered o’er,
- Where no man dwelt since nor before.
- It was not built by human art,
- Nor brick nor lime in any part,
- Nor wood, nor rock, nor nails, nor kiln,
- But curiously was wrought within.
- ’T was not in heaven, nor yet in hell,
- Nor on the earth where mortals dwell.
- Now if you know this man of fame,
- Tell where he lived and what’s his name.”
-
-“Jonah in the whale’s belly!” promptly cried Ronald.
-
-“Did you ever see this puzzle?” inquired Otis. “A man has a wolf, a goat
-and a cabbage to carry across a river. It wont do to leave the wolf and
-goat together, nor the goat and the cabbage, and he can carry only one
-at a time, the boat is so small. Now what shall he do?”
-
-After a moment’s thought, Kate gave the solution, as follows:—
-
-“First he carried over the goat; then returned and got the cabbage; then
-he took back the goat, and left it, and carried over the wolf; then last
-of all he went and got the goat.”
-
-“Let’s see who can find this one out,” said Ronald. “A sea captain on a
-voyage had thirty passengers—fifteen Christians and fifteen Turks. A
-great tempest arose, and he had to throw half of them overboard. They
-agreed to let him place them in a circle, and throw every ninth man
-overboard, till only fifteen were left. He did so, and when he got
-through, every Christian was saved, and every Turk drowned. How did he
-do it?”
-
-“That is easy enough,” said Kate; and writing down the figures from one
-to thirty, she counted off every ninth one, and found that the
-Christians and Turks were arranged as follows:—
-
-
- CCCC, TTTTT, CC, T, CCC, T, C, TT, CC, TTT, C, TT, CC, T.
-
-“Let me propose the next puzzle,” said Aunt Fanny. “What English word of
-seven letters can be so transposed as to make over fifty different
-words?”
-
-No one could solve this question, and when the word “weather” was named,
-as the answer, the children could hardly credit the fact that it was so
-prolific, until they had each made out a list of words. Throwing out
-quite a number that were obtained by using a single letter more than
-once, the following long list remained, which perhaps does not exhaust
-the subject:—
-
- We, Where, Ewe, Tea, Her, Here,
- Wet, Wreath, Ere, Tear, He, Hare,
- War, Wrath, At, Tree, Ha, Heat,
- Wart, Water, Ah, Thaw Hat, Haw,
- Were, Ear, Ate, Tare, Hate, Hew,
- Wear, Eat, Art, Tar, Hater, Rat,
- What, Eater, Awe, There, Hart, Rate,
- Whet, Earth, Are, Three, Heart, Raw,
- Wheat. Ether. The. Taw. Hear. Re-wet.
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-“There, I have made forty angles with only five straight lines,” said
-Kate, holding up a slip of paper; “can any body beat that?”
-
-“Let me try,” said Marcus; and in a few minutes he pushed towards Kate
-the accompanying figure, remarking, “There, I’ve made only six lines,
-and if I’ve counted right, there are sixty angles.”
-
-[Illustration]
-
-While the others were amusing themselves with angles, Oscar made the
-annexed sketch, and now passed it to the others, giving out with it the
-following problem:
-
-“A man had a piece of land exactly square, and having four trees
-scattered over it, as you see in the picture. The house took up one
-quarter of the land, and was occupied by four tenants. The owner
-promised them the use of the land, rent free, if they could divide it
-into four parts of the same size and shape, and each to have one tree.
-The question is, how did they do it?”
-
-[Illustration]
-
-After some little puzzling of wits, the lot was divided as in the
-annexed illustration, and the tenants were congratulated on the good
-bargain they had made.
-
-“Otis,” said Ronald, “I’ll bet you can’t tell what the half of nine is.”
-
-“It’s four and a half—any fool might know that,” replied Otis.
-
-“No it isn’t,” continued Ronald, “it’s either four or six, just as you
-please, and I can prove it;” and writing IX, he folded the paper across
-the middle and made his promise good.
-
-“Speaking of arithmetical puzzles,” said Aunt Fanny, “I remember one
-that I worked over for a long time, before I could see into it. It was
-something like this: Two Arabs sat down to dinner, one having five
-loaves, and the other three. A stranger came along and asked permission
-to eat with them, which they granted. After the stranger had dined, he
-laid down eight pieces of money and departed. The owner of the five
-loaves took five pieces, and left three for the other, who thought he
-had not received his share. So they went to a magistrate, and he ordered
-that the owner of the five loaves should have _seven_ pieces of the
-money, and the other only one. Was this just?”
-
-“Why, no, it’s plain enough that it wasn’t,” said Otis. “Each man ought
-to have as many pieces of money as he had loaves.”
-
-“Yes, it was just,” continued Aunt Fanny; “otherwise you would pay the
-man of three loaves for the bread he ate himself. To prove this, divide
-each loaf into three equal parts, making in all twenty-four parts, and
-take it for granted that each person ate an equal or one-third part of
-the whole. You will find that the stranger had seven parts of the person
-who contributed five loaves or fifteen parts, and only one of him who
-contributed three loaves, or nine parts.”
-
-“O yes, I see into it, now,” said Otis.
-
-“That reminds me,” said Marcus, “of an anecdote that I read in a
-newspaper the other day. I treasured it up, intending to relate it in
-school some day, to illustrate the importance of understanding
-arithmetic. It seems two carpenters took a job for one hundred and fifty
-dollars. One of them, whom we will call A, worked one day more than the
-other, B. The wages of a carpenter were two dollars per day. When the
-work was finished, they divided the money, each taking seventy-five
-dollars. Then A wished B to give him two dollars more for the extra day,
-but B refused, as he saw that if he did so, A would have four dollars
-more than he, which was evidently unjust. A insisted, and B insisted,
-and finally they quarrelled. Some of the bystanders took the part of A,
-and some of B; and yet the paper adds that all the parties were
-Americans, and had attended the common schools six or eight years, where
-I suppose they studied arithmetic, just as I suppose a good many other
-children do, without troubling themselves to understand it.”
-
-“How should you have settled that dispute, Otis?” inquired Mrs. Page.
-
-“I should have told them to give A two dollars for his extra day, and
-divide the rest equally,” replied Otis.
-
-“Or if B had given A one dollar, it would have amounted to the same
-thing,” said Mrs. Page.
-
-“Your story,” said Aunt Fanny, “reminds me of an anecdote of a very rich
-miser who lived in England, in the time of Cromwell. His name was
-Audley. He had a wonderful knack of getting and keeping money, and was
-not at all particular how he obtained it, if he did not make himself
-liable to the law. He once heard of a poor tradesman who had been sued
-by a merchant for two hundred pounds. The debtor could not meet the
-demand, and was declared insolvent. Audley then went to the merchant,
-and offered him forty pounds for the debt, which was gladly accepted. He
-next went to the tradesman, and offered to release him from the debt for
-fifty pounds, on condition that he would enter into a bond to pay for
-the accommodation. The debtor was delighted with the offer, especially
-as the terms of the bond were so easy. He was only required to pay to
-Audley, sometime within twenty years of that time, one penny
-progressively doubled, on the first day of twenty consecutive months;
-and in case he failed to fulfil these easy terms, he was to forfeit five
-hundred pounds. Thus relieved of his debt, he again commenced business,
-and flourished more than ever. Two or three years after, Audley walked
-into his shop one morning, and demanded his first payment. The tradesman
-paid him his penny, and thanked him for the favor he had done him. On
-the first day of the next month, Audley again called, and received his
-two pence; a month later, he received four pence; and so on for several
-months, doubling the sum each time. But at last the tradesman’s
-suspicions were aroused, and he entered into a calculation of his
-subsequent payments. I do not remember the sum which it amounted to—”
-
-“Wait a minute—let me figure it up,” interrupted Kate, and she at once
-set her pencil in motion. The calculation employed her and the others
-several minutes. It was ascertained that the tradesman’s last payment
-would have amounted to two thousand one hundred and eighty-six pounds,
-and that the total sum of all the payments would have been four thousand
-three hundred and sixty-nine pounds, omitting odd shillings and pence!
-
-“I suppose the man paid the forfeit, when he found that out,” said
-Ellen.
-
-“Yes, he paid the miser five hundred pounds for his kindness,” replied
-Aunt Fanny.
-
-“I don’t see how any one can dislike arithmetic—I think it is a very
-interesting study,” remarked Kate.
-
-“How curious it is about the figure 9,” said Oscar; “you may multiply
-any number you please by 9, and the figures in the product, added
-together, will make 9, or a series of 9’s. As—
-
- 9
- 7
- —
- 63—6 + 3 = 9
-
- 9
- 3
- —
- 27—2 + 7 = 9
-
- 9
- 12
- ——
- 108—1 + 8 = 9
-
-and so on with any number, no matter how large.”
-
-“You can do the same with any of the multiples of 9,” said Aunt Fanny,
-“as 18, 27, 36, 45, 54, etc. If you multiply these by any number
-whatever, you will have a series of 9’s in the product. Try it.”
-
-Several experiments were made, with such results as the following:
-
- 46
- 18
- ——
- 828—8 + 2 + 8 = 18—1 + 8 = 9
-
- 117
- 27
- ——
- 3159—3 + 1 + 5 + 9 = 18—1 + 8 = 9
-
-“There is another thing about the figure 9 very curious,” said Marcus.
-“If you take any number composed of two figures, reverse it, and
-subtract the smaller from the larger, the sum of the figures in the
-answer will always be 9.”
-
-This was found to be true, as in the following examples:
-
- 96
- 69
- —
- 27—2 + 7 = 9
-
- 54
- 45
- —
- 9
-
- 84
- 48
- —
- 36—3 + 6 = 9
-
- 98
- 89
- —
- 9
-
-Marcus then explained that numbers composed of three or more figures,
-transposed and subtracted in the same way, would always give a series of
-9’s in the product. The children tried the experiment, and the following
-are some of their examples:
-
- 723
- 237
- —-
- 486—4 + 8 + 6 = 18
-
- 8962
- 2698
- ——
- 6264—6 + 2 + 6 + 4 = 18
-
- 32189
- 28913
- ——-
- 3276—3 + 2 + 7 + 6 = 18
-
- 863577
- 736578
- ———
- 126999 = four 9’s
-
- 9216358
- 1982536
- ———-
- 7233822 = three 9’s
-
-“That _is_ curious; but why is it so—does anybody know?” inquired
-Ronald.
-
-“It will take a wiser head than mine to tell why it is so,” replied
-Marcus.
-
-“I found out something the other day about figures that I didn’t know
-before,” remarked Ronald; “and that is, that if you wish to multiply a
-number by five, you can get the same result by dividing by 2, and adding
-a 0 if there is no remainder, or 5 if there is a remainder. Thus, 5
-times 12 are 60. Divide 12 by 2, and add a 0, and you get 60. Or 5 times
-83 are 415; divide 83 by 2, and add 5, because there is a remainder, and
-you have the same number, 415.”
-
-“That is quite a convenient process, sometimes,” said Miss Lee, “but
-there is no mystery about it, like the properties of the figure 9. It is
-in fact the same thing as multiplying by 10 and dividing by 2.”
-
-“So it is,” replied Ronald. “Well, it’s queer that I didn’t find that
-out myself—I thought that I had discovered something new.”
-
-“Do you know how to make the magic square, Marcus?” inquired Otis.
-
-“I used to know how to make _a_ magic square, for there are several
-hundreds of them,” replied Marcus. “Let me see if I can do it, now—I
-suppose I have forgotten all about it.”
-
-“What is a magic square?” inquired Ellen.
-
-“It is a table of figures that can be added together in a great many
-different ways with the same result,” replied Miss Lee.
-
-Marcus in a few minutes produced the simplest form of the magic square;
-and turning to a book in the library, he found another one, both of
-which are here given:
-
-
- ┌───┬───┬───┐
- │ 4 │ 9 │ 2 │
- ├───┼───┼───┤
- │ 3 │ 5 │ 7 │
- ├───┼───┼───┤
- │ 8 │ 1 │ 6 │
- └───┴───┴───┘
-
-
- ┌───┬───┬───┬───┐
- │ 1│ 16│ 11│ 6│
- ├───┼───┼───┼───┤
- │ 13│ 4│ 7│ 10│
- ├───┼───┼───┼───┤
- │ 8│ 9│ 14│ 3│
- ├───┼───┼───┼───┤
- │ 12│ 5│ 2│ 15│
- └───┴───┴───┴───┘
-
-
-The several columns in these tables may be added up in the usual way, or
-crosswise, or diagonally (from one angle to its opposite) and the result
-will always be the same—15 in the first, and 34 in the second square.
-
-Such were some of the methods by which the children were amused, at Mrs.
-Page’s, during the long evenings and stormy days of their vacation. They
-also had singing, reading aloud, story telling, and newspaper
-publishing, by way of change. Of this last I must tell you more.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XII.
-
- THE NEWSPAPER.
-
-
-AND what about the newspaper? Well, it was a famous thing, for a time,
-and made a great stir in the family. The idea originated with Kate, who
-thought it would be rare sport to edit and publish a newspaper among
-themselves; and as the others readily fell in with her plan, the
-enterprise was soon under way. Aunt Fanny, who had frequently written
-for the press, consented to act as editor, and Marcus and the children
-all agreed to contribute their portion towards sustaining the paper. The
-preliminaries were soon settled. The paper was to be called “THE HOME
-WREATH.” It was to be issued weekly, and composed of one or more sheets
-of letter paper, according to the quantity of matter furnished. Its
-contents were to consist of short selections, cut from other papers, and
-original articles. The latter were to be written on one side of narrow
-slips of paper, of a uniform size, so that, with the selections, they
-could be readily pasted into their places, in columns. Of course, but
-one copy of each paper could be prepared, which was to circulate as
-common property. The editor was authorized to reject, correct or
-condense whatever was sent for publication. Communications were to be
-sent to her through the letter-box; and it was further agreed that those
-who contributed an article or letter to the “Wreath” every week, should
-be exempted from further duties as members of the “Letter-writing
-Society,” if they did not choose to keep up their private
-correspondence.
-
-The appearance of the first number of the “Home Wreath” was quite an
-event in the household. The editor maintained a dignified reserve in
-regard to its contents, until the day of publication, when it was
-quietly ushered before its little public, six or seven pairs of eyes
-being intently fastened upon it, before it had been two minutes from
-“the office.” As one and another, who had “a finger in the pie,”
-recognized their bantlings in the crowded columns, they looked pleased
-and surprised, while others, who searched in vain for their
-contributions, seemed still more surprised, and not quite so well
-pleased. But here are the “Notices to Correspondents,” which doubtless
-explain it all. Ah, yes, the editor is already bothered with articles
-too long for her little paper, or too carelessly written to appear in
-its columns. Well, perhaps this will be a salutary warning to the
-offenders; and meanwhile, they can avenge themselves by criticising the
-articles which have been more successful than their own. But we hear no
-captious criticism, and perceive no signs of ill nature. The “Wreath” is
-read, laughed over, discussed and admired by all, and at once takes its
-place as an “established fact.”
-
-The second number of the new paper promptly appeared, the next week, and
-was generally regarded as an improvement on the first. The third was
-indeed a surprise number, and produced a great sensation in the family.
-It was issued on Ronald’s birth-day, who went early to the letter-box,
-thinking himself entitled to the remembrance of his correspondents, on
-such an occasion. He found a lot of small packages in the box, addressed
-to different persons, on one of which he found his own name. Tearing off
-the envelope, there appeared before him the “Home Wreath,” neatly
-printed from real type, on printing paper! He could scarcely credit his
-eyes, at first, but the evidence of its genuineness was too plain to be
-disputed, for there was one of his own articles in real print! The
-discovery was quickly known all over the house, and each of the inmates
-found a copy of the paper in the post office, bearing his or her
-address. Marcus and the editor both feigned surprise, when questioned
-about the affair; but after a while the facts leaked out. An old
-playmate and intimate friend of Marcus was employed in the printing
-office of the neighboring village. Marcus frequently visited him, and,
-with a view of getting up a birth-day present for Ronald, arranged with
-his friend to print the “Wreath” for that occasion. The plan was
-successfully carried out, as we have seen.
-
-A transcript of this little sheet is given on the next two leaves,
-somewhat reduced in its dimensions and the size of its type, to suit our
-pages, but containing all the matter of the original.
-
-
- THE HOME WREATH.
- ══════════════════════════════════════════
- VOL. I. HIGHBURG, DECEMBER 4. NO. 3.
- ══════════════════════════════════════════
- THE HOME WREATH:
-
- A Weekly Journal for Home Improvement.
-
- PAGE & CO., PUBLISHERS.
-
- Terms—Gratis.
-
- ---------------------------------------------------------
-
- For the Home Wreath,
-
- LINES,
-
- INSCRIBED TO RONALD D. PAGE.
-
- I’m twelve! I’m twelve to-day!
- Hurrah, boys! let us shout!
- Come, leave your work and play,
- And kick old care away;
- Ye gloomy thoughts, get out!
- We’ll have no mopes about—
- I’m twelve! I’m twelve to-day!
-
- I’m twelve! I’m twelve to-day!
- A dozen years have fled
- Since first the morning ray,
- All sober, cold and gray,
- Stole in upon my head;
- How fast old Time hath sped!
- I’m twelve! I’m twelve to-day!
-
- I’m twelve! I’m twelve to-day!
- Then help me to be glad!
- Come all, and let’s be gay—
- There’s nothing more to pay
- For being bright than sad;
- Cheer up, then, lass and lad!
- I’m twelve! I’m twelve to-day!
-
- * * * * *
-
- An Exercise for Scholars.
-
- IN England, young candidates for appointment in the civil service are
- subjected to rigid examinations, designed to test their abilities and
- acquirements. The following extract, which we have somewhat abridged,
- shows one of the methods adopted for securing this end. It is said to
- be a literal copy of a document which a young applicant for a
- government clerkship was required to correct while undergoing his
- examination. We wonder how many of our young readers could put it into
- proper shape without consulting the dictionary.—ED.
-
- “CHARACTER OF WASHINGTON.—At the braking out of the revolushonery war
- in Amerrica, Washinton joined the caus of indipendance. To detale his
- conduct in the yeares which followed would be butt to relaite the
- hystery of the American War. It may be said generaly that wethin a
- verry short peeriod after the declarashion of indipendance the affairs
- of Amerrica were in a condishun so desparate, that perhapps nothing but
- the piculear caractar of Washinton’s genious could have retreaved them.
- It required the consumate prudance, the calm whisdom, the inflexable
- firmness, the modarate and well-balenced temper of Washinton to imbrace
- such a plann of pollicy and to pursivere in it: to resist the
- tempations of entreprize to fix the confidance of his solders without
- the attraction of victery: to support the spirrit of the armey and the
- peopel ammidst those sloe and caushious planns of difensive warfare
- wich are more despereting than defeate itself: to restrain his owne
- hambition and the empettuosity of his troupes: to indure temparary
- hobscurety for the sallvation of his contry and for the attanement of
- solled and imortal glory: and to suffer even temparary reproach and
- oblaquy, supported by the haprobation of his own consience, and the
- applaus of that small number of wise men whose praise is an earnest of
- the hadmeration and grattitoode of possterity. Corage is enspired by
- succes, and it may be stimulated to dasperate exirtion even by
- callamity, but is generally pallseyed by inactivity. A sestem of
- caushous defence is the severest tryal of human fortitoode and by this
- teste the firmness of Washington was tryde.”
-
- * * * * *
-
- HATE.—Hannah More said: “If I wanted to punish an enemy, it should be
- by fastening on him the trouble of constantly hating somebody.”
-
-
- The Home Wreath.
- ──────────
- SATURDAY, DECEMBER 4.
- ─────────────────────
-
- Nothing Insignificant.
-
- OUR humble sheet is a very small affair; but if any stern critic is
- disposed to despise it on that account, let us remind him that there is
- nothing so small as to be wholly insignificant, when viewed in all its
- relations. We everywhere find little things linked with greater, and
- thousands of minute and hidden causes are constantly interlocking and
- working together, to bring about those events which impress us with
- their vastness and importance. A spark of fire may set in train a
- conflagration which will lay waste thousands of acres. Large and
- populous islands in the Pacific Ocean owe their origin to very small
- insects. The great globe itself is made up of little particles—the
- universe is but an aggregate of atoms. The astronomer finds it
- necessary to note the minutest fractions of time in observing the
- transit of a star whose age is perhaps measured by thousands of
- centuries, and whose revolutions extend through infinite space. Thus
- are moments linked with ages in the economy of nature, and thus are we
- reminded that nothing is so minute as to be insignificant.
-
- --------------
-
- I Can’t.
-
- This phrase is always in the mouth of some children when requested to
- do anything. We once knew a boy who was greatly addicted to its use. He
- wanted to learn to skate, but after one unsuccessful attempt, he gave
- it up, saying, “I can’t.” The next summer several of his playmates
- learned to swim, and he also wanted to learn; but after getting his
- mouth and ears full of water, one day, he cried, “I can’t,” and that
- was the end of his swimming experiments. If his class had a difficult
- lesson, he never learned it, and his excuse was always the same—“I
- can’t.” We once set him a copy in his writing-book, and told him that
- if he could not imitate it perfectly, he must write as well as he
- could. “I can’t,” was the ready reply. “What!” we exclaimed, “_can’t_
- you write as well as you can?” He looked ashamed, but made no reply.
-
- That boy is now a young man, but he is an ignorant, idle, and shiftless
- fellow, and, we fear, will never be of much use either to himself or to
- the world.
-
- Commend us to the boy or girl who never says “I can’t,” except when
- enticed to do wrong. “I can” does all things; “I can’t,” nothing.
-
- --------------
-
- To Correspondents.
-
- Several articles intended for this number are crowded out. We shall
- probably have to issue a double number next week, to accommodate our
- friends.
-
- We observe that some of our correspondents occasionally apply the
- pronoun _thou_, and the pronominal adjectives _thy_ and _thine_, to
- plural nouns. This is wrong. _You_ and _yours_ may be used either in
- the singular or plural number; but _thou_, _thy_ and _thine_ are always
- singular. You cannot say to a father and mother, as a poem which we
- lately saw in a newspaper, (_not_ the “Wreath,”) said,—
-
- “_Thy_ darling is in heaven.”
-
- --------------
-
- News Items.
-
- ☞ The Winter Term of the Highburg Academy commences on Monday next, and
- will continue eleven weeks. Robert Upton, A. M., Preceptor; Mr. Marcus
- Page, Assistant Teacher; and Miss Martha D. Tillotson, Teacher of
- Drawing and Music.
-
- * * * * *
-
- ☞ It is reported that traces of bears have been recently seen near
- Turkey Hill, in the eastern part of Highburg. Several bears have been
- killed this winter in the upper part of the county, and we should not
- be surprised if some of the “varmints” made us a visit ere long.
-
- * * * * *
-
- ☞ A lynx was shot last week in Burlington. The paper from which we
- glean this item says: “The animal is a rare one in Vermont. It is of a
- grayish color, with ears ending in tufts of black hair, standing [not
- the ‘ears,’ nor the ‘hair,’ we presume, but the lynx] a little more
- than a foot high, and measuring three feet in length. It subsists on
- hares, rabbits, and such small animals, occasionally attacking a sheep,
- or even a deer, by dropping on them [it] from a branch of a tree.”
-
- * * * * *
-
- ☞ Two boys who had been skating in New York, a week or two since, were
- attacked with violent cramps and inflammation, and one of them died
- from the effects. It is conjectured that they laid down upon the ice,
- while heated from their exercise. This should be a warning to skaters.
-
- * * * * *
-
- ☞ The snow which fell Wednesday, though light, is sufficient to make
- pretty good sleighing, and every body seems to be improving it. The
- proprietors, contributors and subscribers of the “Wreath” took their
- first sleigh-ride, this season, on Thursday. They were all comfortably
- stowed away in a sleigh and a pung!
-
- ═════════════════════
- Correspondence.
- ─────────────────────
-
- For the Wreath.
-
- Small Beginnings.
-
- A gentleman was once examining a very large and fine library in Boston,
- when the lady who had introduced him, asked him if he would like to see
- the “nucleus” of the collection. (If you do not know what “nucleus”
- means, you will have to turn to the dictionary, as I can think of no
- simpler word to substitute for it.) “Yes, I should like to see it,”
- replied the visitor. She then exhibited to him a Latin dictionary,
- which she said was purchased by the owner when a boy, with money
- obtained by the sale of blueberries. The owner was a farmer’s boy, and
- that is the way he began his fine library. He is now a learned man, and
- is well known in this country and in Europe.
-
- * * * * *
-
- For the Wreath.
-
- Vanity—A Fable.
-
- Two birds, whose plumage was very brilliant, and whose song was
- beautiful, were sitting on a tree, singing, when they discovered a man
- looking at them very intently. “There is an admirer—see how we have
- entranced him!” cried one of the birds, and she put on her proudest
- air, and warbled her sweetest song. “I do not like to be gazed at so
- earnestly by a stranger,” modestly replied the other bird; “come, let
- us go and hide ourselves from the intruder.” The modest bird flew into
- a thicket and concealed herself; but the other, flying to the top-most
- bough, began to show off all her airs, when suddenly the sharp crack of
- a gun was heard, and the silly bird fell dead.
-
- MORAL.—“Pride goeth before destruction, and an haughty spirit before a
- fall.”
-
- KETA.
-
- * * * * *
-
- For the Wreath.
-
- MISS EDITOR:—I feel slighted. You are all writing for the “Wreath,” but
- not a soul of you has asked me to contribute to your interesting paper.
- Why is this? Have I not heard some of you say that I know as much as
- many human bipeds of the same age? Don’t I understand almost everything
- that you say to me? And if I only _could_ talk, wouldn’t I rattle away
- as fast as any of you? I bet I would. If I don’t talk, it isn’t because
- I’ve got no ideas, depend on that. But you see I can write, although
- perhaps you did not know it. But fearing I am an intruder, I will stop.
-
- ROVER.
-
- * * * * *
-
- For the Wreath.
-
- The Snow.
-
- Hurrah! The snow has come!—Now wont we have fine times! I like to see
- it come thick and fast, and bury everything up. How curious it is, to
- see the woods, and fences, and stones, and roofs, and fields, and
- hills, covered over with the pure white snow! What fun it is to roll
- and tumble in it! I like to have the roads all blocked up, so that we
- can’t get anywhere, not even to school. Then what fun it is to break
- out the ways! We have a large sled, with a plough lashed to the off
- side. Then we hitch on six or eight yoke of oxen, and are ready for a
- start. The boys load up the sled, and a lot of men go ahead to shovel
- through the deep drifts, and so we go all over town till the roads are
- broken out.
-
- RON.
-
- * * * * *
-
- For the Wreath.
-
- A Cunning Fellow.
-
- The summer that I lived in Brookdale, I was one day in the woods, with
- my cousin Jerry, and another boy, named Clinton, when we found a fox’s
- hole. We began to dig her out; but when we got to the end of the hole,
- we found nothing. Clinton said he had known a fox to bank herself up in
- a separate cell, when her hole was invaded; and we determined to see if
- our fox had not served us so. We dug, and soon found eight little ones,
- all stowed away in a cell by themselves. We then tried to find the old
- one, but could not. So we took the little ones and started off; but on
- looking back we saw the old fox dart out of the hole and disappear. We
- went back to examine the hole again, and found that she had a separate
- cell for herself, which escaped our search. So she saved her own life,
- but she lost her little ones.
-
- OSCAR.
-
- ═════════════════════
- Gleanings.
- ─────────────────────
-
- Digest what you read. It is not what you eat but what you digest that
- gives nourishment to the body; so with the mind. Young people sometimes
- run through a book, and are not able to tell afterwards what they have
- been reading.
-
- “John,” said the schoolmaster, “you will soon be a man, and will have
- to do business. What do you suppose you will do when you have to write
- letters, unless you learn to spell, better?” “O, sir, I shall put easy
- words in them.”
-
- “Dick, I say, why don’t you turn the buffalo robe t’other side
- out?—hair is the warmest.”
-
- “Bah, Tom, you get out. Do you suppose the animal himself didn’t know
- how to wear his hide?”
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIII.
-
- MASTER PAGE.
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
- SO impatient was Ronald to enter upon his academic career, that he had
- his school books and his slate all ready for a start, Saturday
- afternoon. On going up to his chamber, later in the day, he was
- pleasantly surprised to find a nice new satchel upon his table, which
- his mother had made for him, as a birth-day present. He packed his
- books into it, and swung it over his shoulder, and walked back and
- forth, to see how it would seem. While he was thus indulging in
- pleasant anticipations, his room-mate, Otis, was undergoing a very
- different experience. Entering the chamber, without noticing Ronald, he
- threw himself upon the bed, and burst into tears. Ronald did not need
- to inquire what ailed him. His parents had that afternoon made their
- promised visit to Kate and Otis, and had just started for home, and the
- poor boy was consequently suffering from that most distressing malady
- of the mind—home-sickness. Ronald’s efforts to enliven him proved
- unavailing, and he was reluctantly compelled to leave him to his grief,
- which did not wholly subside until sleep came to his relief.
-
- On Monday morning, more than half an hour before the first stroke of
- the academy bell was heard, Ronald was busily engaged in hurrying up
- his academical associates, whose moderation in getting themselves ready
- for the day’s business seemed to him almost too bad to be patiently
- endured. However, contrary to his predictions, all arrived at the
- academy in good season, though they went in straggling parties—for it
- was the preference of all to walk, rather than ride, when the weather
- and the roads permitted. Of course, they carried their dinners.
-
- At five minutes before nine o’clock the bell sounded, and the scholars
- and teachers assembled in the school-room. The forenoon was spent in
- taking the names of the pupils, assigning seats, forming classes,
- giving out lessons, and in general remarks to the students on the
- purpose for which they had assembled, and the duties which they were
- expected to perform. Most of the preliminary matters were settled, in
- the forenoon, and the regular studies commenced with the afternoon
- session.
-
- The incidents of the day afforded plenty of topics for conversation to
- Marcus and the students from his family, as they proceeded home, at
- night. General satisfaction was expressed that one of the monitors’
- desks, overlooking a division of the smaller boys, had been assigned to
- Oscar. This arrangement seemed peculiarly gratifying to Ronald and
- Otis, who thus came under his oversight, and who smiled incredulously,
- when he declared that he should keep a particularly sharp eye upon
- them. Oscar expressed himself as much pleased with the preceptor, Mr.
- Upton. Kate, who had been promoted to the highest class, and was in
- excellent spirits, said she always admired Mr. Upton, and thought she
- should rather like his new assistant, Mr. Page. Otis and Ronald, on the
- other hand, were a little disappointed because Marcus had disregarded
- their joint request, that they might sit together, and had placed them
- so far apart that any intercourse during school hours, except by means
- of winks, signs and paper “spit balls,” would be out of the question.
- The reason Marcus gave for this refusal,—the fear that they would have
- too good a time together,—was not very consoling to the boys. Instead
- of Otis, Ronald had for his nearest comrade the boy who blotted his
- writing-book at the district school, Lewis Daniels. Both Marcus and
- Ronald, however, treated Lewis with kindness, and tried to make him
- forget the injury he had inflicted upon the latter.
-
- The ardor with which Ronald set out for school in the morning was a
- little dampened by one or two other incidents that occurred during the
- day. At noon, as he approached a group of large boys, he heard one of
- them say—
-
- “I don’t care for Marcus Page—he’s nothing but a boy, himself. He was a
- scholar, here, for a year or more after I joined the academy.”
-
- On turning round, and seeing Ronald near, the large boy added—
-
- “Here, you youngster, you needn’t go and tell Page everything you hear,
- because you happen to live with him; because if you do, you’ll be sorry
- for it.”
-
- Ronald had no heart to report this conversation to Marcus, though he
- cared nothing for the threat. His ears tingled, however, to hear Marcus
- spoken of in this way, and from that moment he felt a strong dislike
- towards the boy in question, who, to do him justice, was not so bad as
- he seemed, but only had an unhappy habit of saying more than he felt,
- and threatening more than he was willing to perform.
-
- Another large boy,—a mischievous but not ill-meaning fellow,—annoyed
- Ronald a good deal by applying to him the nickname _Frenchy_, and
- telling him he had got to wear it as his “academical name.” Ronald
- reported this to Marcus; but the latter advised him to take no notice
- of the affair, telling him that the inventor of the nickname would
- probably soon forget all about it, if he saw that it did not trouble
- Ronald.
-
- “Who would have thought of seeing Jessie Hapley in the academy!”
- exclaimed Kate, as they were walking home. “I declare, I never was more
- surprised in my life—they are so poor, you know.”
-
- “But Jessie is a very fine girl, if she is poor,” said Marcus.
-
- “O, yes, I like her very much,” promptly responded Kate; “and I’m glad
- she is going to school with us; but I didn’t suppose her father could
- afford to send her.”
-
- “She earned the money herself, to pay for her tuition,” added Marcus.
- “She sees she has got to support herself, if not the rest of the
- family, and she is anxious to qualify herself for teaching. She thinks
- she is better adapted to that business than to any other, and I think
- so, too. She is an excellent scholar, and you will have to look out for
- your laurels, Kate, now that she is in school.”
-
- “Well, she is older than I am,” said Kate, quite unconcerned.
-
- “Only a few months,” added Marcus; “besides, her school privileges have
- been very limited, compared with yours.”
-
- “No matter, I don’t think I shall be jealous of her,” replied Kate. “I
- always did like Jessie, and if any girl is going to excel me, I’d
- rather it should be her than any one else. But Abby Leonard declares
- that she wont associate with her. She says she hates to see a poor girl
- all the time ‘trying to be somebody.’”
-
- “I am afraid Abby is not so wise as she might be, if she _has_ enjoyed
- the advantages of city society,” observed Marcus.
-
- “Do you know what she does to make herself look pale and slender?”
- inquired Kate. “She eats chalk, and slate pencils, and drinks lots of
- vinegar. She advised me to try it, because I’m so plump. She thinks it
- doesn’t look interesting and genteel, to be fat.”
-
- “I hope you wont follow her advice, unless you wish to ruin your
- health,” replied Marcus. “I shall have to speak to her about this
- subject—she has fallen into a very dangerous practice, as well as a
- foolish theory. In fact, if she consumes those articles to any extent,
- she is committing suicide, whether she knows it or not.”
-
- The current of events continued to flow on smoothly day after day, at
- the academy, until one morning, when the principal failed to appear.
- Marcus opened the session, at the usual hour, and soon after received a
- note from Mr. Upton, stating that he was ill, and unable to be present.
- Marcus conducted the school through the day, with very good success,
- and before returning home, called upon his associate, whom he found
- prostrated with an illness which would probably detain him from his
- labors for several weeks.
-
- “I do not see but that you will have to take my place, for a week or
- two, Marcus,” said Mr. Upton. “We have got well under way, and
- everything is going on smoothly, so that I think you and Miss Tillotson
- can manage matters very well, for a little while.”
-
- Marcus shook his head, and looked somewhat alarmed, at this
- proposition. Nor was he slow in making known his objections. He had had
- little experience in teaching, even the simpler branches, and as to the
- higher studies, he was appalled by what he considered his lack of
- qualifications. Then how could he, an inexperienced youth, maintain the
- discipline of such a school, composed in part of pupils as old as
- himself, some of whom had been his school-mates a year previous? Mr.
- Upton, however, did not give much heed to these objections. He did not
- doubt Marcus’s qualifications to teach any of the branches, and as to
- the discipline, if he experienced any trouble, the trustees would give
- him all necessary aid. As it would be impracticable to make any other
- arrangement, at least for a week or two, Marcus at length consented to
- assume this new responsibility.
-
- The next morning, Marcus informed the scholars of the new duties that
- had devolved upon him, and expressed his determination to do his best
- to make good their preceptor’s place, at the same time soliciting their
- aid and co-operation in the work. With now and then a trifling
- exception, the school was as orderly and quiet as usual, and Marcus was
- soon satisfied that the public sentiment of his charge was on his side,
- and would sustain him in his position. This was especially true of the
- older scholars, of whom he had most stood in doubt. Appreciating the
- value of their privileges, even the least sedate of them had no
- inclination to come in collision with their young teacher, for whom,
- indeed, they all felt some degree of esteem, as a personal friend.
- Neither did the younger pupils manifest any disposition to question his
- authority. Two days’ experience satisfied Marcus that the only pupils
- from whom he had reason to anticipate trouble were three or four boys,
- some thirteen or fourteen years old; and he had no doubt that he should
- be able to bring these turbulent spirits into subjection, in a few
- days.
-
- These troublesome boys happened to be seated together, near the back
- part of the room, and at times they created some little disturbance in
- that quarter. Before dismissing school at night, Marcus pleasantly
- informed them, separately, that he proposed to re-seat some of the
- boys, and then proceeded to arrange such an exchange of desks as
- brought them nearer to his platform, and at the same time scattered
- them apart. One or two of the worst of them, by this change, were
- brought under the monitorial eye of Oscar.
-
- Marcus now made it a special object to secure the confidence and
- good-will of the more unruly part of his charge. One noon, he saw
- several of his most troublesome boys at work upon a snow figure, in the
- grove back of the academy. He approached them, and, commending their
- skilful workmanship, soon drew them into a pleasant conversation. As he
- watched the growing statue, he observed that the credit belonged mainly
- to one of the lads, named Charles Wilder, who directed the labor of the
- others. Marcus had noticed that this boy exercised a good deal of
- influence over his comrades; but in the school-room he was rather
- inattentive to his lessons, and inclined to mischief.
-
- “Charlie’s the boy for this kind of work,” said one of the lads,
- addressing Marcus.
-
- “Yes, I see he understands it,” replied Marcus. “You have quite an
- artist’s eye, Charlie. Where did you learn so much about modelling?”
-
- “O, I don’t know much about it—all I do know came natural to me,”
- replied the boy.
-
- “I remember seeing an account of a young man in this State,” said
- Marcus, “who made a statue of snow and ice that was so beautiful, that
- a rich gentleman ordered a copy of it in marble. Perhaps you will be as
- fortunate as he, one of these days.”
-
- “I mean to be a sculptor, some time or other,” replied Charles, his
- face lighting up with an expressive smile.
-
- “I suppose it’s hard work to make a statue, isn’t it?” inquired one of
- the boys.
-
- “No, I don’t know as it is exactly what you would call hard work, but
- it requires a good deal of skill, and taste, and genius, to make a fine
- statue,” replied Marcus.
-
- “O, I suppose they have plenty of tools, and pound it out,” observed
- another boy.
-
- “Pound out your grandma’am with tools, just as much!” exclaimed
- Charles, with a glance of mingled pity and indignation at the boy who
- held this degraded view of the beautiful art to which his soul was thus
- early wedded.
-
- “You must be somewhat proficient in drawing, Charlie, to design such a
- statue as this,” resumed Marcus.
-
- “I’m very fond of drawing, but I don’t know much about it,” replied
- Charles.
-
- “You are not taking lessons in drawing, I believe?” inquired Marcus.
-
- “No, sir; I wanted to, but father said it was of no use,” replied
- Charles.
-
- “I think it _would_ be of use,” said Marcus; “that is, if you have as
- much taste for it as I think you have. I wish you would let me see one
- of your drawings,—perhaps I could persuade your father to let you take
- lessons, if I think it worth while.”
-
- “I’ve got one in my desk—I’ll run and get it,” said Charles; and he
- darted off, soon returning with a very neatly executed drawing of a dog
- hunting a stag, which he had copied with much skill from an engraving.
-
- “That is very creditable to you—very much so,” said Marcus, as he
- examined the picture. “You certainly have a taste for drawing, and your
- father must let you take lessons of Miss Tillotson. I will speak to him
- about it, this week.”
-
- The young artist looked pleased and grateful, and Marcus left him, not
- only feeling a new interest in the boy, but with a firm persuasion that
- he should have no further trouble with him.
-
-[Illustration]
-
- The above is a representation of Charles’s drawing. Marcus took the
- trouble to call upon Mr. Wilder, that afternoon, and after a little
- persuasion obtained permission for Charles to take drawing lessons.
-
- A day or two after this, Marcus found on his desk, one morning, an
- anonymous note, which read as follows:—
-
- “TO MASTER PAGE:—I think it is too bad that some of the
- scholars should be allowed to have keys to their arithmetics,
- when it is against the rules. Fair play is a jewel. This is
- from
-
- ONE WHO KNOWS.”
-
- Marcus was for a time in doubt what to do in relation to this
- complaint. The anonymous character of the note deprived it of all claim
- upon his attention; and its apparently implied censure upon him for
- something of which he had no knowledge, rendered it still more
- objectionable. After reflection, however, he determined to investigate
- the matter at once, leaving to a future occasion some remarks to the
- school on the impropriety and meanness of writing anonymous letters of
- complaint. He accordingly remarked to the school:—
-
- “I have been informed that some of the scholars have keys to their
- arithmetics. I wish all such would rise.”
-
- Much to his surprise, Oscar promptly arose, and said:—
-
- “I have a key, but I have made no improper use of it. I do all my sums
- before I look at the answers.”
-
- “Did you not know that it is contrary to the rules for any scholar to
- have a key?” said Marcus.
-
- “Yes, sir,” replied Oscar.
-
- “That is sufficient,” said Marcus. “You have violated one of our rules,
- whatever use you may have made of the key. If you have it here, you may
- deliver it up.”
-
- Oscar obeyed the order, his appearance indicating that he felt the mild
- rebuke rather keenly. It is due to him to say, that with this
- exception, his conduct in school had thus far been quite exemplary, and
- his progress in his studies commendable.
-
- After Ronald had become somewhat familiar with the school, he found it
- rather difficult to wholly repress the promptings to fun within him.
- During the first week of the principal’s absence, Marcus had occasion
- to reprove him several times, privately, for offences of this kind, and
- on one occasion, detained him after school, as a punishment. One
- afternoon, as Marcus was hearing a class recite, he was startled by one
- of his most quiet boys crying out:—
-
- “You quit that!”
-
- “What is the matter, Edmund?” inquired Marcus.
-
- The boy, coloring deeply replied:—
-
- “Ronald has been snapping nut-shells at me for half an hour, and he
- just hit me in the eye with one. I was very busy ciphering, and I spoke
- before I thought. I forgot I was in school.”
-
- Ronald was called out, a handful of nuts was transferred from his
- pocket to the teacher’s desk, and he was then directed to stand upon
- the platform facing the school, until he had committed to memory a page
- from a geography used by another class. In all this Marcus was as calm
- and mild as usual; but nevertheless, Ronald did not feel very
- pleasantly, as he took his position and commenced his task, though the
- punishment was not what he feared it would be, when called out. His
- mortification was not a little increased, when, after reciting the
- task, Marcus assigned him a new seat, directly under his own eye.
- Ronald avoided all company, on his way home, that afternoon, and seemed
- especially anxious to keep out of the reach of Marcus, through the rest
- of the day. Marcus, however, had something to say to Ronald, and after
- tea he found an opportunity to say it.
-
- “Ronald,” he said, “I have been thinking that I had better increase
- your lessons a little. I am afraid you are getting along too easily at
- school.”
-
- “Why, I think our lessons are pretty hard,” replied Ronald, somewhat
- surprised.
-
- “They are hard enough for most of your class, but you learn so readily
- that I shall have to give you some extra tasks,” added Marcus.
-
- “I don’t think that is fair,” replied Ronald. “If I get all the lessons
- that the others do, I should think that is enough.”
-
- “If your lessons are so easy that you learn them without much effort,”
- continued Marcus, “you are missing the real end of going to school. It
- is not the chief aim of education to give a child a smattering of
- knowledge, but the object should be to discipline his mind, and that
- cannot be done without real tasks—lessons that will make him study
- hard, and think closely. He needs something to rouse him to exertion,
- and then he will begin to find out what his powers are. I think I shall
- let you study book-keeping and algebra, with the third class, in
- addition to your other lessons.”
-
- “Well, if you think best, I will try it,” said Ronald.
-
- “I have another reason for this,” added Marcus. “You have too many idle
- moments, now. Your lessons are not hard enough to keep you out of
- mischief. I shall have to increase them until you have no time for
- idleness or mischief during study hours.”
-
- Marcus imposed the additional studies upon Ronald, the next day. The
- salutary effects of this, and of the incidents of the previous
- afternoon, were soon apparent. He was careful, however, not to overtask
- the boy’s powers, which would have been a greater evil than the
- opposite error.
-
- With Otis, Marcus found a different course of management necessary. He
- was more quiet and orderly in school than Ronald, but less perfect in
- his lessons. Indeed, he was not remarkably fond of study, and needed a
- little spurring, now and then, to prevent his falling below the average
- of his class. One afternoon, as he was walking home with Marcus, he
- said:—
-
- “I can’t get that sixth sum right, any way. I’ve tried it half a dozen
- times, and I get it exactly the same every time. The answer in the book
- must be wrong, for I know I did it right. I did the other sums in just
- the same way, and they came right.”
-
- “You are wrong,” replied Marcus, “for I happen to know that the answer
- in the book is right. Georgianna Ellis came to me this afternoon with
- the same story. She thought the answer in the book was a mistake. But I
- did the sum, and found it right.”
-
- “How did you do it?” inquired Otis.
-
- “That is for you to find out yourself, if you can,” replied Marcus,
- with a significant accent upon the last clause of the sentence.
-
- “Didn’t you show Georgianna how to do it?” inquired Otis.
-
- “No,” replied Marcus; “I told her to read over the question carefully,
- and then to keep trying upon it until she got the right solution.”
-
- “Did she get it?” inquired Otis.
-
- “I do not know,” replied Marcus; “but if she has not found out her
- error, I have no doubt she will.”
-
- “Then I suppose you think I can do the sum, if I keep trying,” said
- Otis.
-
- “I have some doubts about that,” replied Marcus. “I suppose I ought to
- give you the same direction that I gave Georgianna; but I have little
- faith that you would be successful, after all.”
-
- “Why couldn’t I find out the answer, if she can?” inquired Otis.
-
- “There is a great difference in scholars,” replied Marcus. “Some are
- careful, and examine everything very closely, when they meet a
- difficulty, while others blunder about without much thought. Some have
- great perseverance, and others are quickly discouraged. And then some
- do not seem to have much sense, or if they have, they don’t exercise
- it.”
-
- Otis did not push his inquiries any further, and the subject was
- dropped. The stimulus of shame, judiciously applied, is sometimes
- effective when other means fail, and so it proved in this case. Otis
- was not discouraged by what Marcus said, but was incited by it to a new
- and more earnest effort. He solved the problem, unaided, and so derived
- more real benefit from this one puzzling question than from all the
- others in the day’s lesson, which he performed without difficulty.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIV.
-
- THE TROUBLESOME SCHOLAR.
-
-
- THERE was one boy in the academy who still caused Marcus no little
- anxiety. His name was Harrison Clark, and he was about fourteen years
- old, and large for his age. This was his first term at the academy. He
- was from an adjoining town, and but little was known of him, except
- what he himself chose to divulge. The achievement of his short life
- upon which he seemed to pride himself most, was a fight he had with his
- former teacher, a month or two before this, in which, according to his
- representation, he came off victor; and he had been heard to threaten a
- similar infliction upon Marcus, should that personage attempt to
- chastise him. One or two of the elder pupils were anxious that the
- insolence of this pert young gentleman should be checked by a sound
- thrashing, and they even intimated to the teacher that aid would not be
- wanting, in case the boy should offer serious resistance. But Marcus
- thought there was a more excellent way to subdue him, and determined to
- try it, before resorting to harsh measures.
-
- Marcus happened one day to fall in with a townsman of Harrison, from
- whom he gathered all the information he could in regard to the career
- and character of the boy. It appeared that he had been governed with
- severity, both at home and at school, so far as he had been governed at
- all. He had steadily grown worse, however, under this discipline, and
- his parents, finding they could do nothing with him, had sent him away
- to school, as the easiest way to rid themselves of a constant trouble.
- They were finally led to this course, by his altercation with his
- teacher. Several boys, it seemed, got into a wild frolic in the
- school-room, one day, before the opening of the session, in the course
- of which Harrison threw an inkstand at another lad, by which his face
- and clothes were stained, and the walls, floor, and seats soiled. The
- teacher, after investigating the matter, ordered Harrison to hold out
- his hand for punishment, which he refused to do, in an insolent manner.
- The teacher then attempted to seize his hand, but failing in this, he
- tripped the boy upon the floor, and a regular scuffle ensued. Another
- boy, still larger than Harrison, now rushed to the assistance of the
- latter, and before the disgraceful affray ended, they inflicted two or
- three serious blows upon the teacher, and then fled. They were both
- arrested for assault, and after a trial before a justice, were fined,
- Harrison ten dollars and the other boy five, besides the cost of the
- trial, which was divided between them. While it must be confessed that
- their punishment was just, I think few will deny that the teacher also
- was to be blamed for the part he acted in the affray.
-
- “Now can’t you tell me something good about Harrison?” inquired Marcus,
- after listening to the foregoing recital. “I believe there is always
- some good trait in every person, however bad.”
-
- “Well,” replied the other, “I’m thinking it would be rather hard to
- find anything very good about that chap. I don’t think he’s very
- hardened yet, but there’s precious little goodness about him, I can
- tell you. He thinks a good deal of his mother, and that’s the best
- thing I ever saw about him. And he ought to like her, for she’s a right
- down good woman—only she’s one of your easy, gentle sort, that oughtn’t
- to have anything to do with such a young scapegrace as he is.”
-
- Although Harrison had made himself sufficiently troublesome in the
- school-room, he had thus far avoided all flagrant offences. He
- manifested his disposition by an air of quiet insolence and defiance,
- and by petty acts of annoyance, too trivial for serious notice, even
- could they be proved against him, which was seldom the case. It was
- evident, however, that he was becoming emboldened by the absence of
- restraints and punishments with which he had been familiar in school,
- and Marcus looked forward with some solicitude to the certainty of an
- open collision with him, which day by day seemed more imminent.
- Meanwhile, the attempts of Marcus to win him over by kindness were not
- very well rewarded. If he spoke kindly to the boy on the play-ground or
- at his desk, he got no pleasant word or grateful look, in return. If he
- tried to draw him into conversation, the responses came grudgingly in
- monosyllables. On Saturday, he invited Harrison to come over to pass
- the afternoon with him and the children; but the boy did not come;
- worse yet, he did not say whether he would or not; and still worse, he
- expressed no thanks for the invitation.
-
- One cold morning, soon after the school opened, Marcus was somewhat
- annoyed by the coughing of the scholars—not a very unusual occurrence
- at that season. Having reduced the school to perfect silence, so that
- the falling of a pin might have been heard, he proceeded to say:—
-
- “I notice that many of the scholars have rather troublesome coughs. I
- have a cold myself, and I suppose I could cough as hard as any of you,
- if I chose to. But I am not going to do it. There are two objections to
- coughing. One is, it is injurious. The effort required in coughing is
- apt to tear the delicate fibres of the lungs. Sometimes people burst
- blood-vessels, while coughing, and die in consequence. The other
- objection is, it is unpleasant to those around us, especially in a
- school-room, church, or other public assembly. Sometimes, I admit, it
- is necessary to cough; but I think most of our coughing is unnecessary.
- By a little attention, and a little effort of the will, we can prevent
- it. Now I propose that those who have colds try the experiment with me,
- and we will see who will hold out longest without coughing.”
-
- Marcus had no sooner closed, than Harrison fell into a violent fit of
- coughing, which it was evident to all was feigned. Some of the younger
- scholars smiled at this ill-mannered freak, but others looked daggers
- at its perpetrator. Marcus uttered no rebuke, but the eyes of the rogue
- fell before his steady, quiet, searching look.
-
- A day or two after this, there was great excitement in the village,
- occasioned by the discovery that several sheep had been killed by
- bears, the tracks of which were found in the neighborhood of “Turkey
- Hill.” The presence of these animals in the town had been suspected for
- several weeks, but this was their first attack upon the sheep-folds of
- the farmers. Arrangements were at once made for a grand bear hunt, the
- next afternoon, and all the male population, above fifteen years of
- age, were invited to take part in it.
-
- Marcus found, the next morning, that most of his boys had come to
- school prepared to join in the hunt, either as participants or
- spectators. All who could, had procured guns, and as the lads and young
- men lounged around the academy, in groups, examining and comparing
- their arms, a stranger might have suspected the existence of a “school
- rebellion” of a really startling description. But when the bell struck,
- the guns were peaceably deposited in the ante-room, and the school-room
- assumed its usual quiet aspect. At recess several of the boys were
- dismissed, having brought notes from home, requesting Marcus to excuse
- them at that hour. Two or three others petitioned for a similar favor,
- but, having no authority from their parents for making the request,
- Marcus felt obliged to deny them. He did this the more easily, because
- he thought the request a needless one. The hunting party was not to
- rendezvous until half past twelve o’clock—half an hour after the
- session closed for the day, for it was Saturday. Nevertheless, Harrison
- Clark, who was one of the disappointed applicants, appeared to think
- differently; for when the boys were called in from recess, he was
- missing. On looking from a window, Marcus saw him standing, gun in
- hand, near the post office, where a crowd of men appeared to be
- discussing the arrangements of the day. One of the large scholars was
- despatched to bring the runaway back; but Harrison saw the young man
- approaching, and mistrusting his errand, took to his heels, and made
- good his escape.
-
- At twelve o’clock the session closed, the contents of sundry little
- baskets and tin pails were hurriedly disposed of for the benefit of the
- inner man, and most of the boys, accompanied by their teacher, then
- proceeded to the place of rendezvous. After waiting awhile for tardy
- stragglers, the hunting party was found to muster over a hundred men
- and boys, all armed. An experienced hunter was chosen captain, a few
- directions were given to the men, and the line of march was then taken
- up for Turkey Hill, some two miles distant.
-
- On reaching the hunting ground, the guns were loaded, and the party
- then proceeded to form a ring around the hill, which was a low
- eminence, densely wooded, and abounding with ledges. Two files of men
- started in opposite directions, and encircled the hill until they met,
- scattering themselves apart as they proceeded. Then, to test the
- connection of the ring in all its parts, the captain cried to his left
- hand man, “_Are you there?_” and he taking up the call, according to a
- previously arranged plan, shouted it to the man on his left, and thus
- it passed around, until it came back in a few moments to the leader. He
- then gave the order, “_Forward!_” in a similar manner; and as it ran
- round the line, the party began its slow march up the hill. They
- continued to ascend, gradually closing up the circle, until it embraced
- only about an acre of woods. The circle was now quite impervious to any
- animal, the hunters being within a few yards of each other. Only a
- small portion of the ring, however, was visible at any one point, owing
- to the trees and brush, and the inequality of the surface. Every gun
- was now cocked, and every eye was straining itself, to detect some sign
- of the presence of Bruin. Suddenly, the sharp crack of a gun was heard,
- followed by another, and another; and almost immediately, a large bear
- bounded out, towards the part of the circle where Marcus and Oscar were
- stationed. But ere the poor beast could reach the line, a score of
- bullets were buried in his body, and he fell dead. Loud and long was
- the shout of triumph that went up from every side; and still louder did
- it grow, when it was found that this was not the only trophy, but that
- another though much smaller bear had been shot on the opposite side of
- the ring, when the reports of firearms were first heard.
-
- The two carcasses were placed on sleds, and dragged to the village by
- the boys. The largest bear was found to weigh about four hundred and
- fifty pounds, but the weight of the other was a little short of two
- hundred pounds. Before the people separated for their homes, the two
- carcasses were put up at auction, and sold for about fifteen dollars.
- It was voted to give the money to the owner of the sheep killed by the
- bears—an aged man, in needy circumstances, who looked the gratitude he
- could not speak, when the generous proposal was ratified by a hearty
- “Aye!”
-
- On Monday morning, when Marcus read to the school the names of
- absentees at the previous session, and called for excuses, he came to
- the following entry: “Harrison Clark—left at recess.” He paused a
- moment, and as no excuse was offered, added—
-
- “Harrison, when school is dismissed in the afternoon, you may come to
- my desk.”
-
- “This _after_noon or _fore_noon?” inquired Harrison, not at all
- abashed.
-
- “I said this _after_noon,” replied Marcus, who postponed the matter
- until that hour, because of the limited intermission from studies at
- noon.
-
- As Marcus anticipated, Harrison was going off without paying any regard
- to this command, in the afternoon; but when called he went back, saying
- by way of apology that he forgot all about the matter. When they were
- alone, Marcus inquired, very pleasantly—
-
- “Well, Harrison, how did you enjoy yourself, Saturday afternoon?”
-
- “First-rate—didn’t you?” coolly replied the boy.
-
- “Do you think you enjoyed the hunt as much as you would if you hadn’t
- gone off at recess, contrary to my express orders?” inquired Marcus.
-
- “Well, yes, I don’t see as that made any difference,” replied Harrison,
- looking as calm and unconcerned as though he were discussing the point
- with some comrade.
-
- “I see you are inclined to be frank,” continued Marcus. “I am glad of
- that—I like frank, open dealing in everybody, boys as well as men.
- Don’t you?”
-
- “Why, yes, I do,” replied the boy.
-
- “And are you willing to be perfectly frank with me, if I will be so
- with you, in talking over matters now?” inquired Marcus.
-
- “Well, I can’t stop long—I agreed to go somewhere, after school,”
- replied Harrison.
-
- “But we must attend to this business first,” replied Marcus, in a
- decided tone. “Now if you say you will deal frankly with me, I will
- proceed at once.”
-
- “Well, I will,” said Harrison.
-
- “Then I will be equally frank with you, and so we shall have a fair
- understanding of each other,” replied Marcus. “I have noticed for
- several weeks, especially since Mr. Upton has been sick, that you were
- inclined to be disrespectful towards me, and to annoy me and the school
- by certain little improprieties that it was difficult to prove wilful,
- though they certainly seemed to be so. As I know of no reason why you
- should wish to trouble me—for I believe I have always treated you
- kindly—I have taken as charitable a view of this as I could. I have
- tried to think that you did not mean any harm, but were only a little
- odd in your ways. But when you set my authority at defiance so coolly,
- last Saturday, I saw that something more serious than oddity was the
- matter. And that something has got to be met, promptly and decidedly.
- Now there are two ways of meeting such a spirit in a scholar. One way
- is, to inflict a severe and disgraceful punishment, which will serve as
- a warning to the other pupils, if it does not reform the guilty one.
- The other way is, to win him from his error by mild and kind means.
-
- “Now, Harrison, you know very well which of these systems of government
- we have adopted here. You have seen no rod or ruler, since you came
- here, and I hope you will not, if you stay through the term. But that
- is by no means certain. Sometimes, when mild measures fail, Mr. Upton
- adopts stern ones; but he always tries kindness first. There is only
- one other resort, in desperate cases, and that is, to expel the
- offender. Now, if I have been rightly informed, the harsh system had
- been pretty faithfully tried upon you before you came here, had it
- not?”
-
- “I should think it had—but it didn’t do any good,” replied Harrison.
-
- “And now kindness has been tried, and _that_ has done no good,” added
- Marcus, with a serious look. “What more can be done? Do you think that
- you ought to be privileged to do as you please, while all the other
- scholars are required to be obedient, and orderly, and respectful? You
- said you would be frank with me; now will you answer me that question,
- honestly?”
-
- “I suppose not,” replied Harrison, rather reluctantly.
-
- “Very well, now I wish you to answer another question, as frankly as
- you did that,” continued Marcus. “Do you think I ought to be expected
- to sacrifice my feelings, and strength, and time, in trying harsh
- measures upon a boy, when the experiment has already been made by
- others, and, as he admits, without any good result?”
-
- “No, sir,” replied the boy, in a more respectful tone than usual.
-
- “Neither do I,” said Marcus. “Then if kind measures fail, as they have
- in your case, so far, expulsion is the only remedy left; and that, of
- itself, is a very harsh, and painful, and disgraceful punishment. I
- can’t bear to think of it. It is casting the boy out from influences
- that might save him, into a world of new temptations and dangers. If he
- were the only one involved, I would put up with a great many
- provocations, before I would sentence a boy to such a fate as that. But
- the interests of the school sometimes require that a scholar should be
- expelled, and then the teacher must do his duty, however painful it may
- be. In such a case, the teacher and the boy are not the only sufferers.
- The parents and friends of the offender often suffer even worse than he
- does. I hear, Harrison, that you have an excellent mother. Is it so?”
-
- “Yes, sir,” replied the boy.
-
- “I have been told,” continued Marcus, “that she is a very kind, gentle,
- and sensitive woman. I hear, also, that you appear to think a great
- deal of her, and I hope the report is true, for a _good_ mother is a
- blessing for which we can never be too grateful.”
-
- The expression of the boy’s face, at this mention of his mother,
- indicated that the report was not without foundation.
-
- “Now,” continued Marcus, “how would your mother feel, if you should go
- home, and tell her that you had been expelled from the academy, for
- misconduct? Would it not almost break her heart? For her sake, as well
- as yours, I hope we shall not have to fall back upon that last resort.
- But as I promised to be frank with you, I must tell you, in all
- sincerity, that the course you have been pursuing will certainly lead
- to expulsion, if not abandoned. I do not say this to frighten you, but
- I am honestly pointing out to you a _real_ danger, and one that you
- will assuredly encounter very soon, if you do not take warning. You
- have been quite frank with me, so far, now I want to know if you will
- give me a plain and honest answer to one more question?”
-
- “I will,” replied Harrison.
-
- “I am going to ask the question now,” continued Marcus, “but you need
- not answer it to-night. I would rather that you should take time to
- think it over, and let me know your decision to-morrow. The question is
- this—whether you intend to keep on in your old habits, as though
- nothing had happened, or will you try to correct the faults I have
- mentioned? You will please to take notice that the question refers only
- to your _intentions_. I do not ask you to promise never to disobey or
- be disrespectful again; but if you have any intention, or even the
- slightest wish, to reform these habits, I want you to say so, and I
- will help you all I can to accomplish the work. On the other hand, if
- you really prefer to do as you have been doing, I want you to tell me
- that, just as candidly. Remember you promised to be frank. You can go,
- now, and to-morrow you may tell me your decision.”
-
- Harrison’s bearing was somewhat more subdued and respectful than usual,
- when he left Marcus. The same peculiarity was apparent in his conduct
- the next day, in school. When school was dismissed at noon, Harrison
- went of his own accord to the teacher’s desk, and said:—
-
- “Mr. Page, I’ve thought over that matter that we talked about
- yesterday, and I’ve made up my mind to try to do better, hereafter.”
-
- “I am very glad to hear you say so, Harrison,” replied Marcus, grasping
- the boy kindly by the hand. “If that is your intention, I have no doubt
- we shall get along pleasantly enough after this.”
-
- “I’m sorry I went off, Saturday, and I wont do such a thing again,”
- added Harrison.
-
- “That was quite a serious act of disobedience,” replied Marcus,
- “although I have refrained from saying much about it directly, thus
- far. If I should conclude that the offence required some kind of
- punishment, notwithstanding this confession, do you feel as though you
- could submit to it cheerfully?”
-
- “Yes, sir, I think I could,” replied Harrison, rather hesitatingly.
-
- “I suppose the fact that you ran away is known to all the scholars,”
- observed Marcus. “Now should you be willing to make the apology as
- publicly as the offence?”
-
- This was a pretty severe test for Harrison. Remembering the braggadocio
- with which he had alluded to his offence, only the day before, in the
- presence of many of his school-mates, it was hard to say he was willing
- to stand up before them all, and humbly acknowledge his fault.
-
- “Give me a frank answer, that is all I ask,” added Marcus, as he
- perceived the conflict in his pupil’s mind.
-
- “Well, I suppose I ought to confess in public, and I must do it, if you
- say so, but it will come dreadful hard,” replied the boy, who seemed
- anxious and perplexed.
-
- “Yes, I suppose it would be a very disagreeable duty,” said Marcus;
- “and on the whole, I think I will not ask it of you. The scholars know
- that I have taken private notice of the offence, and perhaps that will
- answer every purpose. If you will show to them a better example
- hereafter, that is all I will require, this time. The past shall all be
- forgiven and forgotten.”
-
- The boy looked pleased and grateful, and before retiring, repeated his
- promise of amendment. This promise he kept. His feelings towards Marcus
- seemed to have undergone an entire change. True, every fault in his
- character and conduct was not corrected at once; but as there seemed to
- be a prevailing disposition in him to conform to the rules of the
- school, united with a sincere respect for his teacher, Marcus looked
- upon his errors as leniently as possible, and endeavored to encourage
- him in his good work by every proper method.
-
- The next Monday, Mr. Upton resumed his post, and complimented Marcus
- very highly on finding the academy in so prosperous a state.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XV.
-
- ABOUT SAM HAPLEY.
-
-
- MR. HAPLEY, the father of Jessie and Sam, and the near neighbor of the
- Pages, seemed to be growing more slack than ever, this winter. Fields
- of corn-stalks were still standing on his farm, although it was well
- advanced in December, he having neglected to cut them in the fall, for
- his cattle. It was even reported that a good part of his potatoes were
- frozen into the ground, as he had delayed digging them until it was too
- late. His family and stock were not so well provided for that they
- could afford thus to throw away the produce of the farm. Plenty by no
- means reigned in the house, and as to the barn, its inmates bore
- unmistakable testimony that poor hay, with few roots and less grain,
- would not keep cattle in good condition.
-
- One morning, after the last stick of cut wood had been consumed, and a
- rod or more of the fence, also, had been used to “keep the pot
- boiling,” Mr. Hapley mustered sufficient resolution to go up to the
- wood-lot, with his team, after another load. He got a neighbor to go
- with him, for although one might have supposed Sam was large enough to
- chop wood, Mr. Hapley always said he was “good for nothing to work,”
- and Sam was very careful never to give him occasion to alter his
- opinion.
-
- In all such expeditions as this, there were two things that always
- accompanied Mr. Hapley. These were, a pipe and a jug. With something to
- smoke, and something to drink, he considered himself amply fortified
- against all the demands of appetite, for half a day at least. The young
- man who accompanied him on this occasion, was not at all averse to an
- occasional mug of cider, or whiskey, or, indeed to any other beverage
- that could claim kindred to these. So an extra-sized jug, nearly full
- of old cider of the hardest and sourest kind, was put on the sled, and
- tied to one of the stakes, to keep it in place.
-
- “Now, you children,” said Mr. Hapley, as he was about starting, “you
- behave yourselves, all on you. You Sam, I want you to fodder them cows
- this noon, if I don’t get home. And mother,” he added, addressing his
- wife, “don’t let Benny play out in the wet, he’s got such a cold.”
-
-[Illustration]
-
- With these admonitions, the father departed. Unfortunately, there was
- no one to admonish him to behave himself, though perhaps he needed such
- a caution as much as his children. Arrived at the wood-lot, he and his
- assistant took a full “swig” from the jug, and then commenced work. By
- the time Mr. Hapley had felled one tree, he felt the need of another
- draught of cider; and seating himself on the prostrate trunk, he again
- tipped the jug, and then lighting his pipe, resigned himself to quiet
- contemplation. The sturdy strokes of his more industrious companion, if
- they reproached him, did not arouse him from his lazy lethargy for half
- an hour, and then he returned to his work only for a short time, soon
- seeking refreshment again from the jug and pipe. It was past noon when
- the sled was loaded up with green wood, and by this time, Mr. Hapley
- was in no amiable mood, the soothing influence of the pipe not having
- been equal to the exciting effects of the cider, which always made him
- as sour as itself. His companion, too, was not quite so cheery as when
- he came into the woods. He thought it rather hard fare, to do more than
- three-fourths of the work, and drink less than one-fourth of the cider.
- So they mounted the load, and drove home, scarcely speaking to each
- other on the way.
-
- “My patience!” exclaimed Mrs. Hapley, as the team entered the yard;
- “have you brought me a load of green stuff, at this time of year, and
- not a stick of dry wood about the premises? What _shall_ I do!”
-
- “Do? why, you can stick it up in the chimney corner, and dry it,”
- replied Mr. Hapley, quite unconcerned.
-
- “Well,” added his wife, with a sigh, “if I had only known you had no
- wood seasoning up in the lot, I’d have gone and cut some myself, sooner
- than try to burn that stuff.”
-
- “You’re always a telling what _you’d_ do,” replied Mr. Hapley; “now I
- wish you’d go and do it, just once, and say nothin’ about it. Plague on
- ’t! how is a feller going to chop wood, when he’s got the rheumatis’ so
- he can’t stand up? It seems as though women hadn’t no consideration
- about some things.”
-
- Mrs. Hapley always refrained from bandying words with her husband, when
- he was in an irritable mood, and she made no further reply. He took the
- horses from the team, (for, according to his slack system, it was time
- enough to unload the wood, when the sled was needed again,) and led
- them into the barn. In a few moments he returned, and inquired, in a
- stern tone:—
-
- “Who fed them cows, this noon?”
-
- “I did,” replied Mrs. Hapley. “Sam wasn’t here, at noon, and so I took
- care of them.”
-
- “Just the way with that plaguy Sam,” added Mr. Hapley. “He’s never
- about when anything’s to be done. Here, Sam! Sam!” he called at the top
- of his voice; but Sam did not respond, and Mr. Hapley continued, “What
- did you give ’em such a mess of hay for? They’ve wasted more’n half of
- it, and got it all over the barn. I don’t see what you was thinking of.
- We can’t afford to litter the critters with hay, when it’s as skerce as
- ’tis now.”
-
- “I don’t think I gave them too much,” replied Mrs. Hapley. “The fact
- is, they don’t like the hay, and they wont eat it up clean.”
-
- “Where’s Benny?” inquired Mr. Hapley, suddenly noticing that his
- youngest boy was absent.
-
- “He’s gone out to play,” replied his wife.
-
- “I told you not to let him go out in the slosh—he’ll be sick ag’in, you
- see if he aint,” said Mr. Hapley.
-
- “He’s dressed warmly, and got his thick boots on,” replied Mrs. Hapley.
- “It is so pleasant that I thought it would do him good to be out a
- little while in the air.”
-
- Mr. Hapley withdrew to the barn, and was feeding his horses, when a
- loud scream from Benny startled him. Running to a window in the back of
- the barn, he saw the cause of the outcry. Sam had thrown Benny down in
- the snow, and was pushing him about in it, and rubbing it into his face
- and neck. They were by the roadside, a few rods from the barn. Mr.
- Hapley flew to the door, and called to Sam, but Benny’s outcry drowned
- his voice. He then ran towards them, but Sam had finished the assault,
- concluding with a few vigorous kicks, before he saw his father
- approaching. Mr. Hapley was so enraged at what he had witnessed, that
- he could hardly listen to a word of explanation. Benjamin, a lad of
- nine years, was his youngest child, and was supposed by the rest of the
- family to be the father’s favorite. He was not at this time in robust
- health, which added to Mr. Hapley’s excitement, on seeing him abused by
- Sam. The origin of the assault, which Mr. H. did not stop to
- investigate fully, was this. Benny, seeing his brother coming up the
- road, hid himself behind a stone wall, until he had passed, and then
- playfully threw a soft snow-ball at him, which chanced to hit him on
- the head, though not with much force. Sam instantly started for his
- little brother, who fled; but overtaking him, the unfeeling boy pitched
- him into a snow bank, and rolled him in it, then “washed his face in
- snow,” sprinkled several handfuls of the fleecy element down his neck
- and back, and finally kicked him, as has been stated.
-
- Mr. Hapley led the boys as far as the barn, and after telling Benny to
- go into the house, and ask his mother to take care of him, he pushed
- Sam into the barn, assuring him that _he_ would attend to him. Having
- closed the doors, he ordered Sam to take off his coat, but the
- refractory boy refused. Enraged at this, the father seized him, and a
- desperate struggle ensued, the boy resisting even to blows, and the
- anger of the other waxing fiercer every moment. But Mr. Hapley was a
- powerful man, and the result of the contest was not long in doubt. The
- coat was stripped from the boy’s back, and despite his efforts to
- escape, he soon found himself bound hand and foot to a post, utterly
- helpless. As it was useless to struggle, he now betook himself to
- yelling, which he did with such effect that all the family were soon
- drawn to the spot. But Mr. Hapley sternly ordered them all away, and
- then taking a heavy cart whip, commenced beating the boy with great
- severity. Soon the cries of the sufferer again brought the mother and
- the younger children to the spot, and despite the father’s commands,
- Mrs. Hapley and Jessie entered the barn, and with tears pleaded for
- Sam. But the father, whose natural feelings were now blunted and
- benumbed by liquor, and whose wrath was stirred almost to its lowest
- depths by the resistance Sam had offered, took no notice of the
- sympathizing intruders, but kept on with the cruel punishment.
-
- Marcus, who had heard the first outcry, and suspected the nature of the
- trouble, ran at once over to Mr. Hapley’s, and entered the barn just at
- this juncture. The mother and daughter both besought him to interpose
- in behalf of the unfortunate boy, whose shirt was already slightly
- stained with blood. On his entrance, however, Mr. Hapley stayed his
- hand, and, looking somewhat abashed, as Marcus thought, inquired—
-
- “What do you want here, sir?”
-
- “Don’t you think you have punished Sam about enough?” inquired Marcus,
- mildly.
-
- “I guess I can flog my children without any advice from you—you’d
- better go home and mind your business,” was the reply.
-
- “I didn’t mean any offence, Mr. Hapley,” continued Marcus, in the same
- calm tone. “I heard Sam screaming, and I thought I would run over and
- see what the matter was, for I didn’t know but somebody was abusing
- him. You would have done the same thing, if you had been in my place,
- Mr. Hapley.”
-
- “I wouldn’t punish him any more, now, father,” said Mrs. Hapley; “I
- think it’s time to stop when the blood runs.”
-
- “Are you sorry for what you did?” inquired the father, addressing Sam.
-
- “Yes,” replied the boy, in a surly tone.
-
- “Well, then, I’ll let you off, with this,” said Mr. Hapley. “But mind
- you, you wont get off so easy another time, if you don’t behave
- yourself, so look out. I’ve let you alone till you’re almost sp’ilt,
- but I’m going to turn over a new leaf with you, now. You’ve got to toe
- the mark, or else I’ll put the marks onto your back—one of the two.”
-
- Mr. Hapley, as he said this, unbound the boy, who, on being released,
- went into the house, followed by his mother and the children. Marcus,
- finding himself alone with the misguided father, thought it his duty to
- address a word of remonstrance to him against such punishments.
-
- “Mr. Hapley,” he said, “do you think this is the best way to discipline
- a boy? Isn’t it a rather harsh remedy?”
-
- “I wont have nothing to say to you or anybody else about that,”
- responded Mr. Hapley. “It’s nobody’s business if I choose to whip my
- boy, and I wish folks would mind their own affairs, and let me alone. I
- guess I’m old enough to know what I’m about, and if I aint, I don’t
- want your advice.”
-
- “I am aware no one has a right to interfere,” replied Marcus, “unless
- you _abuse_ your child. In that case I suppose you know the law will
- protect him. If you didn’t abuse Sam, just now, I think you came very
- near it.”
-
- “What’s that?” exclaimed Mr. Hapley. “Do you come over here to sarce
- me, in my own premises, you young upstart?”
-
- “I see it is of no use to talk with you now, Mr. Hapley,” Marcus calmly
- replied, and then withdrew.
-
- The next morning, Jessie, with tears in her eyes, informed Marcus that
- her brother was missing. He had evidently gone off in the night,
- intending to seek his fortune elsewhere, for he had taken a change of
- clothing. Before starting for the academy, Marcus called on the Hapleys
- to see if he could be of any service to them, in their new trouble.
-
- “No,” said Mr. Hapley, gruffly, “we aint a going to send after that
- boy, nor no such thing. If he’s a mind to run away, let him run, that’s
- all. I’ll warrant he’ll get enough of it, and be glad to get home
- ag’in, before a month’s out.”
-
- Mrs. Hapley looked anxious, and the children sad, though the father
- seemed quite unconcerned. No steps were taken to bring back the
- fugitive, or even to ascertain in what direction he had gone, and
- nothing was heard from him, until about a week after, when he suddenly
- made his appearance one evening. He was in a sorry plight, his feet
- being somewhat frosted, his clothes having suffered from rough usage,
- and he being very tired and hungry. His parents received him with
- unexpected kindness, and even Mr. Hapley himself was more pleased at
- his return than he was willing to confess. Sam, however, did not seem
- inclined to say much about his adventures, during his week’s absence,
- and the curiosity of the family, on that point, was far from satisfied.
-
- Two or three days after Sam’s return, a couple of strangers drove up to
- the door, and having found Sam, told him he was their prisoner, at the
- same time showing him a writ authorizing his arrest. They also informed
- Mr. Hapley that they were empowered to search the house for stolen
- property; adding that a robbery had been committed in a town about ten
- miles distant, and there was reason to suspect his son had some
- connection with it. The shock of this intelligence so affected Mrs.
- Hapley, that she fainted. While her husband was using means for her
- recovery, the officers put a pair of hand-cuffs upon Sam’s wrists, to
- prevent his escape, and then took him up into his chamber, where they
- commenced the search. There was an old bureau in the room, which they
- examined very thoroughly. They also scrutinized the boy’s clothing,
- peered into the fire-place and up the chimney, looked for loose boards
- in the flooring, and examined holes in the plastering, but all to no
- purpose. They then overhauled the bed, and soon drew out from among the
- feathers a package which was found to contain a breast-pin, several
- silver spoons, and a watch. With this they announced themselves as
- satisfied, and soon started off with their prisoner.
-
- The news of Sam’s arrest spread through the village like wild-fire.
- Marcus heard of it as soon as he was out of school, in the afternoon.
- On the way home, he overtook Jessie and Kate, who, full of spirits,
- wondered that Marcus should be so sober. The sad news was not broken to
- Jessie until she entered her home, where she found her father upon the
- floor, drunk, and her mother sick in her bed, while Benny was silently
- weeping, as though his heart were breaking. Henry alone was able to
- explain to her what had happened. The poor girl could hardly help
- sinking to the floor, as Henry related his story; but feeling that this
- was no time to give way to her emotions, she controlled her nerves with
- admirable coolness, and soon partly forgot her own sorrow, in her
- efforts to relieve the others. She prepared some medicine for her
- mother; put a pillow under her father’s head, having tried in vain to
- assist him to a chair; spread an old coat over him, to prevent his
- taking cold; spoke a few words of comfort to Benny; and then proceeded
- to get supper.
-
- It was soon whispered about town that Mr. Hapley, since the arrest of
- his son, had abandoned himself to his cups worse than ever. Several of
- his neighbors kindly remonstrated with him against the course he was
- pursuing, and urged him to take some steps in aid of his misguided boy;
- but their efforts were all in vain. Although Sam’s trial was to come on
- in a few days, none of his friends had been near him, to offer him
- advice or assistance. In this extremity, Mrs. Hapley appealed to Marcus
- for assistance, who readily consented to do all he could in behalf of
- the boy. The next day he drove over to the town where Sam was awaiting
- his trial, accompanied by Mrs. Hapley. They found the boy alone in a
- cell, looking very dejected. He burst into tears, on seeing his mother,
- and for several minutes neither of them could speak. Marcus, in a kind
- tone, told him they had come to see if they could do anything for him,
- and urged him to tell them frankly all about the stolen property found
- in his room, that they might the better know how to proceed. Sam at
- once expressed his willingness to do so, and then related his
- adventures, from the time he left home until his return. His story, in
- substance, was as follows.
-
- He left home on a pleasant moonlight night, as soon as he was satisfied
- all the family were asleep. He walked seven or eight miles, and then
- forced an entrance into a barn, where he slept the rest of the night.
- The family gave him a breakfast, the next morning, and he then resumed
- his journey. In the course of the forenoon he reached a large town,
- where he concluded to stop and see what he could do; for he had but
- half a dollar in his pocket, and began to feel a little uneasy. There
- was a large tavern in the village, which was much frequented by
- sleighing parties, and for a day or two Sam managed to pick up a little
- change, by holding horses, and performing other small chores for the
- company. He was allowed to sleep in the barn, and got his meals at a
- low “saloon” near by. The associates among whom he was thus thrown,
- were not of the best kind, and one of them, a young man several years
- older than himself, was an offender against the law, having served out
- two or three sentences in jails. His name was Mack. There was something
- in the face, the conversation, or the peculiar circumstances of Sam,
- that led him to propose to the boy a sort of partnership in crime; and
- as he set forth the gains to be derived from such a course in the
- brightest colors, the boy’s easy virtue made but slight resistance, and
- without much persuasion, he agreed to the proposition.
-
-[Illustration]
-
- The next night after the matter had been settled, Sam made his first
- attempt as a burglar, in connection with Mack. They chose for the scene
- of operations a large and substantial house, occupied by a widow of
- reputed wealth, and her family of young children. The moon shone
- bright, but as the house was in a retired neighborhood, they thought
- they could elude detection. Mack entered the dwelling first, by a
- second story window, standing upon Sam’s broad shoulders to reach the
- sash, which proved not to be fastened down. He then descended to the
- basement, and opened the doors, that they might easily escape in case
- of alarm. Sam now entered, and the two ransacked the lower part of the
- house, helping themselves to a quantity of silver ware, some jewelry,
- two watches, and a good supper. After securing a few articles of value,
- Sam was in haste to escape, but his companion seemed in no hurry, and
- went about the house as leisurely as though he were at home. This free
- and easy bearing doubtless seemed quite professional to Mack, but he
- happened to carry it a little too far for his own safety. Sam,
- impatient of his dilatory movements, was awaiting him outside, when he
- heard a movement in the house which led him to take flight. It seemed
- the widow had been awakened by the burglars, and, arousing her oldest
- son, a brave boy of fourteen, they descended as noiselessly as
- possible. Mack had just before lighted a lamp, and gone down into the
- cellar, to see if he could find a bottle of wine, leaving his plunder
- on the kitchen table. Suddenly the cellar door was closed and locked
- upon him, and he heard strange voices, one of which, the voice of a
- boy, assured him that he had a loaded rifle, and would put a bullet
- through him “in less than no time,” if he attempted to get away. The
- burglar tried to escape by a window, but the rifle was quickly pointed
- at him, outside, and he gave up the attempt. In a few moments help
- arrived, and he was secured. As all the stolen property was not found,
- it was suspected that he had an accomplice, though he refused to give
- any information on that point.
-
- Sam left the village as speedily as possible, directing his steps
- towards a town where he had never been before. After wandering about
- two days, and suffering much from fatigue, cold, hunger, and anxiety,
- he at length reached home, as we have seen. The sudden and unexplained
- disappearance of Sam, from the village tavern, together with the fact
- that he had been seen with Mack several times on the evening of the
- burglary, directed suspicion towards him, and finally led to his
- arrest.
-
- After hearing Sam’s story, Marcus expressed the opinion that he had
- better plead guilty, and frankly own up his offence to the officers of
- justice. This advice was accepted by Sam and his mother. Marcus and
- Mrs. Hapley then secured a lawyer to appear on behalf of the boy at the
- trial; and they also had an interview with the officer who conducted
- the prosecution, explaining to him the circumstances of the case, and
- soliciting his influence in favor of the prisoner, on the ground that
- this was his first offence, and that he had been led astray by a
- hardened offender.
-
- Sam was brought before the court a day or two after, and pleaded guilty
- to the charge of burglary. His counsel urged several reasons for a
- light sentence, and the prosecuting attorney said that, under the
- circumstances, he should not oppose the request. The judge, however,
- thought it was not exactly a case for mercy. The prisoner, he said, was
- a runaway from home. He had voluntarily made himself a vagrant, and had
- shown his willingness to resort to crime, to get a living. No attempt
- had been made to prove a good character for him, and he doubted whether
- such an attempt could succeed. He concluded by sentencing the boy to
- the county jail for four months.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVI.
-
- MERRY DAYS AND SAD ONES.
-
-
- “I DON’T care, I got the start of all of you,” said Ronald, as the
- family were discussing over the breakfast table, Christmas morning, the
- question who was the first to wish the others “a merry Christmas.” “I
- heard the clock strike four, and I jumped right out of bed, and ran
- into the entry, and wished you all a merry Christmas.”
-
- “Well, that wasn’t fair—I was asleep, and didn’t hear you,” said Kate.
-
- “So was I asleep,” “And I,” “And I,” added one and another.
-
- “That makes no difference, so long as _I_ was awake,” replied Ronald.
-
- “Ronald,” said Marcus, “reminds me of a fellow I have either heard or
- dreamed about, who bragged that he got up and wished all the kingdoms
- of the earth a happy new year at one lick. For my part, if any body has
- got any good wishes for me, I should prefer to be informed of it when I
- am awake. And I don’t care much about being lumped in with all the
- kingdoms of the earth, either.”
-
- “Well, sir, I wish you a merry Christmas, _all to yourself_,—I believe
- you are awake now,” said Ronald, with a sly chuckle.
-
- “There, I may as well give in—I wont try to say anything more,” added
- Marcus, as the laugh went round the table at his expense.
-
- After breakfast no little curiosity was excited by a package which
- Marcus handed to Oscar. It was received by Marcus the day before, by
- express, with a note requesting him to deliver it to Oscar, Christmas
- morning. After removing sundry cords and wrappers, the contents stood
- disclosed. There was a fine pair of skates, from his father; a gold
- pen, from his mother; a pair of wrought slippers, from Alice, his
- oldest sister; a beautiful book-mark from Ella, another sister; a book
- from his brother Ralph; and a package of confectionery from George, his
- youngest brother. Brief notes accompanied several of the presents.
- There were also two letters in the package, the handwriting of one of
- which, Oscar did not recognize. It proved to be from a young
- acquaintance in Boston named William Davenport, who went by the
- familiar name of “Whistler” among his comrades. It was written in
- fulfilment of a promise he had made, before Oscar left Boston. The
- other letter was from his mother, and, like all similar favors from
- that source, was full, margin and all, of kind words, good advice, and
- family news. It contained an item of intelligence, however, that cast
- something of a damper over the spirits of Oscar. It was as follows:—
-
- “The brig Susan has been heard from at last. You know we have
- been looking for her ever since October. She foundered in a
- gale in September, off the South American coast, and the men
- took to the boats. One of the boats was picked up, after
- floating about for several days, and the men in it were saved,
- after enduring great hardships, and have arrived here. Nothing
- has been heard of the other boat, on board which was poor
- Jerry. His parents are much distressed about him; but your
- father thinks he may be safe yet, as the boat may have reached
- the shore, or may have fallen in with some outward-bound
- vessel. Let us hope for the best, as long as we can.”
-
- The “poor Jerry” referred to, was a cousin to Oscar. The two boys had
- once been very intimate, somewhat to the damage of Jerry’s character;
- and it was in a great measure owing to this intimacy that Jerry
- absconded from his home, in Brookdale, about a year previous to this
- time, and shipped for a voyage around Cape Horn.
-
- There was to be a children’s Christmas party at the town hall, in the
- evening, and the presents designed for the other members of the family
- were reserved to grace the “tree” that was to be one of the chief
- attractions of the occasion. Marcus and the children constituted a part
- of the committee of arrangements for the festival, and were occupied
- with their duties through a good part of the day. At an early hour in
- the evening, the whole family proceeded to the town hall, where they
- found the chief portion of the town’s population assembled, especially
- the younger part. The hall, with its evergreen decorations, its
- numerous lights, and its sea of happy faces, presented an enlivening
- spectacle. At the hour appointed for opening the exercises, the
- clergyman of the village ascended the platform, and after a few
- remarks, invoked a blessing upon those assembled. Then came an
- introductory declamation, by one of the academy boys, followed by the
- recitation of an appropriate poem by a fair-haired little girl of six
- summers. Next appeared upon the platform our two young friends Ronald
- and Otis, who confronted each other in blank silence a minute or two,
- and then retreated to the ante-room, without exchanging a word. Some of
- the audience were in painful suspense, during this scene, supposing it
- to be a failure; while others began to whisper that it was a tableau,
- and not a dialogue, though they were puzzled to tell what it
- represented, or why the figures should walk to and from the stage, in
- sight of the audience.
-
- A curtain before the platform now fell, and after a few minutes was
- again raised, disclosing to the audience a charming tableau of
- Minnehaha, the Indian maid. The two boys who had acted in the mute
- scene, just before, now re-appeared, and went through very creditably
- with a dialogue, Ronald, the leading speaker, having suddenly forgotten
- his part, on his first appearance. Then followed several songs,
- declamations and tableaux, after which the main attraction of the
- evening was introduced, by the raising of the curtain which concealed
- the Christmas tree from view. A loud and merry shout arose from the
- young folks, which was prolonged for a minute or two, and followed by
- general expressions of admiration from all present. There stood the
- tree, a tall, straight and symmetrical evergreen, illuminated with
- candles, arrayed among its branches, and adorned with artificial
- icicles and snow flakes. The fruits, however, with which every bough
- and twig seemed bending, were the most interesting objects of
- contemplation to the hundred pairs of youthful eyes fixed earnestly
- upon the tree. Many of these fruits, it is true, were hidden from
- sight, by a rind of paper, cloth or wood; but imagination readily
- supplied all deficiencies of this kind, and the little eyes gazed, and
- sparkled, and longed, just as though they pierced through all the outer
- coverings that concealed the tempting clusters which hung upon the
- boughs.
-
- After a few moments, Santa Claus suddenly appeared, and walking across
- the platform, took his station by the side of the tree, amid rapturous
- applause from the company. He appeared to be a venerable personage,
- with a flowing gray beard, and was completely encased in furs, from top
- to toe—fur boots, fur leggings, fur tunic, fur mittens, and a fur cap
- which enveloped all of his head except the face. After silence had been
- secured, he spoke, in tones which seemed very soft and gentle to
- proceed from so rough and ancient a personage, and which not a few of
- the audience declared “sounded just like the voice of Marcus Page.” He
- said he had brought “heaps” of presents, and had almost broken his back
- with the effort. He hoped he had brought something for everybody; but
- if he had not, he trusted they would not blame him, for he had done the
- best he could. He requested the children not to crowd around the tree,
- and invited the recipients to walk up one by one as their names were
- called. He then commenced gathering the fruit, to each of which was
- attached the name of the person it was intended for. And now the sport
- began in earnest. What a queer assortment of articles to gather from
- one tree! There were gold rings, breastpins, lockets, pencils, and
- pens; silver spoons and thimbles; work-boxes, wooden dogs, and stuffed
- rabbits; books, fancy boxes, and popped corn; sleds, skates, and
- mittens; pin-cushions, needle-books, and bags of candy; dolls, pocket
- knives and cologne bottles. But time and patience would fail to mention
- half the things that good Santa Claus handed down to the company. It
- was an hour before the distribution was finished. The company then
- adjourned to the room below, where they found an abundance of simple
- country refreshments provided. A speech or two followed, and with three
- cheers for Christmas day, and three more for Santa Claus, the
- entertainment ended.
-
- There was the usual exchange of good wishes and little keep-sakes, on
- New Year’s morning, but the day was not otherwise distinguished as a
- festival, and the schools kept, and business went on, as on other days.
- As the family were seated at the breakfast table, a light rap upon the
- door was heard, and on answering the call, Jessie Hapley, pale and
- agitated, was found upon the steps.
-
- “Mrs. Page,” she said, as soon as that lady appeared, “mother wants to
- know if you will come right over—she is afraid Benny is dying;” and the
- poor girl burst into tears as she delivered the message.
-
- “Benny dying!” exclaimed Mrs. Page, “why, I had no idea he was so sick
- as that—how long has he been so?”
-
- “He grew worse very fast last night,” replied Jessie. “Henry has gone
- for the doctor, and mother thought perhaps you could tell what to do,
- till he comes.”
-
- “Yes, I will go over immediately,” replied Mrs. Page, and she went for
- her bonnet and shawl, and a minute after started by the shortest cut
- across the fields for the house of sorrow.
-
- Marcus would gladly have accompanied his mother, but for fear that his
- presence at such a time might be regarded an intrusion. Benny was one
- of a class of little boys which Marcus had instructed in the Sabbath
- school for some two years. Partly from the gentle, winning disposition
- of the child, and partly on account of the unfavorable influences to
- which he was exposed at home, Marcus felt an especial interest in him,
- and had watched his decline with no little solicitude. For several
- months past, Benny had been able to attend the Sabbath school only
- occasionally; but every Sunday his young teacher carried or sent to him
- an attractive book from the library, and in other ways manifested his
- continued interest in the sick scholar. It was with a heavy heart,
- therefore, that Marcus heard his mother summoned to Benny’s death-bed,
- on this pleasant New Year’s morning. An hour later, on his way to the
- academy, he stopped at Mr. Hapley’s door, to inquire after the patient,
- and was told that the doctor was still with him, and that the result of
- his efforts in behalf of the boy was yet uncertain.
-
- In spite of the pleasant associations of the day, and the kindly
- greetings with which his scholars met him, a cloud hung over the
- spirits of Marcus, which he was unable to dispel. One incident
- occurred, however, which was peculiarly grateful to his feelings. On
- entering the school-room, he was followed by Harrison Clark, who,
- taking from behind a blackboard a handsomely finished cane, handed it
- to Marcus, and, with some embarrassment in his manner, said:—
-
- “Mr. Page, will you accept of this as a New Year’s present? It isn’t of
- much value, but I made it myself on purpose for you.”
-
- “Ah, is this your work?” inquired Marcus, carefully examining the
- article, which was really well made, in every part. “Did you do it all
- yourself—head, ferule, rings and all?”
-
- “Yes, sir—Mr. Tucker let me use his tools, and I did the whole of the
- work myself,” replied Harrison.
-
- “It is certainly very creditable to you,” continued Marcus. “I don’t
- see how it could be improved. Yes, I will accept it with great
- pleasure, and thank you for it, too. Coming as a present from you, I
- shall value it ten times what it would cost to get such a cane
- made—yes, a hundred times. I shall remember your kindness with
- gratitude, perhaps after you have forgotten both me and the cane.”
-
- “I don’t think I shall forget you very soon—you have been so good to
- me,” replied the boy, with a look which testified to the sincerity of
- the remark.
-
- “And you have proved yourself worthy of my kindness, so I need not take
- much credit for that,” rejoined Marcus.
-
- The boy, who but lately was so bold and defiant in his bearing, blushed
- at this not unmeaning compliment, and withdrew.
-
- When Marcus returned home, in the afternoon, he again stopped to
- inquire after the sick boy, and was requested to go in, as Benny had
- expressed a desire to see him. He found the sufferer in a little bed
- which had been made up for him in the front room, near the fire, for he
- complained much of the cold. A faint smile lit up his face as Marcus
- entered.
-
- “How is he, Mrs. Hapley?” inquired Marcus, as he seated himself by the
- bedside, and took Benny’s cold hand into his own.
-
- “I think he is a little more comfortable than he was this morning,”
- replied Mrs. Hapley. “He has been very much distressed for breath, most
- of the day, but he seems to be better, now.”
-
- “I am glad to hear that, and I hope he will continue to improve,” said
- Marcus.
-
- Benny, whose mild, lustrous eyes had been fastened upon Marcus from the
- moment he entered the door, was too weak to speak aloud; but as he
- seemed to have something to say, Marcus bent his ear down to the boy’s
- mouth, and was addressed in a whisper as follows:—
-
- “I’m not going to get well, and I don’t want to. I’m going to heaven
- pretty soon. I have been longing to go, ever since I was taken sick,
- and now I know I’m almost there. I love God, and Jesus, and the angels,
- and all good folks. Do you remember what you told me about heaven, the
- other day—how many millions of good little children are there, and how
- Jesus calls them his lambs, and wipes away their tears, and takes them
- in his arms? There wont he anything to make us sorry in heaven, will
- there?”
-
- “No,” replied Marcus, his mind recurring to that passage of Scripture,
- “There shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, neither
- shall there be any more pain.”
-
- There was a brief interval of silence, broken only by an occasional
- half-suppressed sigh that escaped from Jessie, who was seated in a
- remote corner of the room, and by the slow and regular tread of Mr.
- Hapley, who was pacing the floor of the chamber overhead, in an agony
- of grief and remorse. Marcus afterwards learned that a few hours before
- this, when Benny was thought to be dying, he had entreated his father
- in a most affectionate and touching manner to abandon the besetting sin
- which was bringing himself and his family to ruin and disgrace. The
- strong man, after a brief but desperate struggle, promised the dying
- boy that he would abandon his cups from that hour, and would try to
- live in such a way that he might meet his little son in heaven.
-
- Mrs. Hapley, who had been engaged in the kitchen, now came in, with a
- bottle of hot water, to be applied to Benny’s feet; but he whispered to
- her:—
-
- “O, mother, I am _so_ cold! Wont you take me up in your arms, and hold
- me before the fire?”
-
- “Yes, dear,” replied his mother, and she took the boy gently into her
- arms, wrapped a blanket around him, and sat down before the blazing
- fire.
-
- This movement seemed to be too much for the boy, for he gasped for
- breath, and sank exhausted into his mother’s arms. After a few minutes
- he recovered sufficiently to speak.
-
- “Why, mother,” he said, “how fast it grows dark! I can’t hardly see
- anything.”
-
- “Jessie, ask your father to come down,” said Mrs. Hapley, trying to
- speak calmly.
-
- “It is dark here, but it is light _there_—O, how light!” whispered the
- dying boy.
-
- “Where?” inquired the mother, scarcely knowing what she asked.
-
- “I don’t know where it is,” replied the boy. “I saw it coming, way off,
- just now, like a bright cloud, and now it’s all around me. Why, mother,
- don’t you see it? The room is all full of it!”
-
- Mr. Hapley now entered the room, but, seemingly unable to endure the
- scene, silently bowed his head against the wall. Jessie and Henry also
- came in with their father.
-
- “I want to kiss you all,” whispered Benny to his mother, after the
- family had assembled.
-
- His wish was complied with, and his mother, father, Jessie, Henry and
- Marcus successively received and returned a parting kiss.
-
- “Now one more for Sammy—you’ll give it to him when he comes back, wont
- you, mother?” added Benny.
-
- The promise was made, and the kiss given. But the poor boy did not know
- that his absent brother was at that moment serving a sentence in jail
- as a convicted felon. The result of Sam’s trial had been wisely
- concealed from Benny, on account of his illness.
-
- The circle had sat in silence for several minutes, when Mrs. Hapley
- arose, and tenderly laying her precious charge upon the bed, kissed the
- pale brow, and said, in a low, calm tone, which almost startled
- herself:—
-
- “It is all over—the bitterness of death is past!”
-
- The spirit of the child had departed so peacefully, that she could not
- tell when he drew the last breath. But the true and loving heart had
- ceased to beat, and the mild eyes were set in death, and the last enemy
- had accomplished his work surely, though noiselessly.
-
- Marcus soon withdrew from the sorrowing circle, his own heart bowed in
- grief as sincere if not as deep as that of the near relatives of the
- deceased. It was the first time he had ever come into the immediate
- presence of death, and had seen, as it were, the fatal arrow wing its
- way into the living mark. It was, indeed, the first time that the grave
- had claimed one in whom he felt so deep an interest, and towards whom
- he held so near a relation; for he never could realize the death of his
- father, followed as it was by years of anxious suspense and hope
- deferred, and shrouded in impenetrable mystery up to this hour.
-
- Mrs. Page and her sister went over to comfort and assist the stricken
- family, while Marcus retired to his chamber, to commune with his own
- thoughts. Though far from unfaithful to his trust as a religious
- teacher, he now lamented that he had done so little for the spiritual
- improvement of the dear boy whom death had just removed from the reach
- of his influence. Never before did he realize so vividly the
- uncertainty of life, the insignificance of worldly ambition, and the
- inestimable value of those treasures which make us “rich toward God.”
- And now, at the beginning of the new year, did he kneel down and ask
- for divine aid, as he pledged himself to strive, with more fidelity
- than ever before, to kindle in the young minds around him desires after
- a higher and purer life.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVII.
-
- ADVERSITY.
-
-
- THE first act of Mr. Hapley, after Benny was laid in the frozen ground,
- was one that gave new hope to the sorrowing household. At his request,
- the clergyman of the village had previously written a pledge of total
- abstinence from all intoxicating liquor, which the afflicted father
- signed upon the coffin of his boy. On returning from the funeral, he
- collected together all the alcoholic liquors in the house, consisting
- of cider, whiskey and brandy, and taking them into the yard, poured
- them out upon the snow. As Mrs. Hapley and the children gazed upon this
- novel scene, they almost forgot their bereavement, in the new hopes and
- joys which seemed now about to be bestowed upon them. And well might
- they take courage. Mr. Hapley had thus far sacredly kept his promise to
- Benny. He was very sad, and his limbs were weak and trembling, and
- there was a terrible craving and gnawing within, that neither food nor
- ordinary drink could satisfy; still he struggled manfully against the
- tempter, and friends not a few stood by, with words of encouragement
- and cheer. Indeed, with his sober and subdued air, his clean-shaven
- face, and the general tidiness of his personal appearance, he already
- seemed like a different man.
-
- The reformation of Mr. Hapley was much talked of among his neighbors
- and acquaintances, and very different opinions were expressed as to its
- permanence. It was generally thought that he would persevere, but there
- were some who had little faith in his good purposes. Old Mr. Todd, who
- held a mortgage on his farm, and who was regarded as quite an oracle,
- shook his head in a knowing manner, when the matter was mentioned at
- the post office, one morning.
-
- “I’ve known Charles Hapley,” said he, “ever since he was a boy, and I
- knew his father before him. The old man had the best farm in town, but
- the family has been gradually running down these twenty years, and it’s
- my opinion that Hapley will die a drunkard, as his father did.”
-
- “Now, Squire,” said an elderly and benevolent looking man, who was
- seated on the counter, “it appears to me you are a little too hard on
- Hapley. They say he’s stuck it out for more’n a week, and not touched a
- drop of anything, and that’s doing pretty well, for him. I hold that we
- all ought to encourage the poor fellow along, and not go around
- predicting that he’ll die a drunkard.”
-
- “So do I hold to encouraging him along,” replied Mr. Todd; “but at the
- same time I don’t believe it will do any good. He never did have any
- control over himself, from a boy, and I don’t believe he’s going to
- keep the bridle on a great while, now. You see if he does, that’s all.”
-
- “Guess the old man means to step in there,” said some one, as Mr. Todd
- went his way.
-
- “Yes, it’s plain enough what he’s after,” said another.
-
-[Illustration]
-
- The speakers alluded to Mr. Todd’s taking possession of the Hapley
- farm, on account of the non-payment of his mortgage. Their conclusion
- was not a very charitable one, to be sure. Nor was it exactly kind in
- Mr. Todd to predict with so much assurance the relapse of Mr. Hapley.
- Still, it must be admitted that he had pretty strong ground for his
- opinion, though he need not have been so free to express it. The lesson
- of self-government is a hard one to learn in mature life, especially to
- a man who has for many years been tyrannized over by depraved appetites
- and passions. The position of such a man is something like that of
- Mazeppa, the young page of a Polish king, who for some offence was
- lashed, naked, to the back of a wild horse, which was then set free,
- and plunged with frightful speed through forest and plain into his
- native country, bearing his helpless and well-nigh lifeless rider with
- him. But when the appetites and passions are the ruled, and not the
- rulers, they may be compared to the same steed, tamed and docile,
- bridled and saddled, and ready to do your bidding. Mazeppa, it is true,
- had the good fortune to survive the painful ordeal, and lived to become
- a prince; but we think few would be willing to run such a race, even
- for such a prize, except upon the wild horses of their own ungovernable
- passions.
-
- But Mr. Todd proved a true prophet, in this instance. In less than a
- fortnight after Benny’s death, Mr. Hapley came home from the village
- one afternoon sadly intoxicated. How he happened to fall, was never
- explained to the family. He had been to the store where liquors were
- sold, on business, and probably the wretched sensation in his stomach,
- aided by the sight and smell of the tempter, the associations of the
- place, and perhaps the coaxings of the drunkard-maker, suddenly swept
- away the breastwork of good purposes he had erected. He tasted—he fell;
- and what a death-blow was that act to the hopes and peace of his poor
- wife and children! To Mrs. Hapley and Jessie, especially, it seemed as
- if the last hope had been swept away.
-
- The next day, when Mr. Hapley realized his situation, he was overcome
- with grief and shame. He was, moreover, discouraged. He had lost both
- his self-respect and his self-reliance. He had no longer any confidence
- in his ability to keep the pledge. Meanwhile his thirst for the deadly
- liquid was growing more insupportable for the fresh stimulus it had
- received. In this pitiable state of mind and body, he went again in the
- afternoon to the rum-shop, and attempted to drown his sorrow in a still
- deeper potation. Towards night, a severe snow-storm set in, but he did
- not return. Hour after hour did his wife sit at the fire, after the
- children had retired, listening for his return; but the wild shriek of
- the wind, as the storm waxed more furious, and the sharp rattle of the
- snow against the window panes, were the only sounds she heard. At
- length, when it was almost midnight, unable longer to bear the terrible
- suspense, she aroused Henry from his sleep, and told him to go over to
- Mrs. Page’s, and ask Marcus if he would not take a horse and go in
- search of the missing man. The boy dressed himself, and plunged into
- the huge snow-drifts. He had not proceeded far, however, before he
- began to doubt whether he should be able either to go on or to return.
- Blinded by the driving storm, transfixed by cutting blasts, the
- divisions between roads and fields quite obliterated, and floundering
- in snow up to his arm-pits, he sank exhausted, more than once, into the
- hole he had made; but with the energy of despair, he again aroused
- himself, and at length reached Mrs. Page’s door-steps.
-
- After considerable effort, some of the family were aroused, and Marcus,
- on learning Henry’s errand, at once prepared to go out in search of his
- father. He concluded he could get along best on horseback; and putting
- a bridle on Charley, the toughest of the two horses, he mounted him,
- and taking Henry behind him, carried him home. He then set out for the
- village, by the route Mr. Hapley had probably taken, which led him
- directly into the teeth of the storm. But he found it impossible to
- keep in the road, and his horse soon began to sink into old drifts
- newly buried, and to flounder among invisible stones, stumps, fences
- and pitfalls, until, at last, the exhausted creature seemed unable to
- proceed further. Marcus was accordingly obliged to give up the search,
- of which fact he informed Mrs. Hapley, before returning home.
-
- The storm moderated in the morning, but owing to the state of the
- roads, several hours elapsed before arrangements could be made to
- search for the missing man. In the course of the forenoon, he was
- found, about a quarter of a mile from the road, sitting in his sleigh,
- with the reins in his hands; but the rider and his horse were both
- frozen stiff. The horse had apparently been thrown down by a log, and
- was unable to rise without assistance, which the unfortunate rider was
- too insensible or too benumbed to render. So they perished there alone,
- and were well-nigh buried from sight before they were discovered. A jug
- of rum, found in the sleigh, furnished a sad clue to the catastrophe,
- had any been needed.
-
- The next day, a new grave was opened in the frozen earth, by the side
- of Benny’s, and the father was laid close by the son he had so lately
- promised to meet in heaven, and to whom he had pledged himself to a
- reformed life. O, how sad is _such_ a funeral, when hope, and honor,
- and happiness, are consigned to the tomb with the remains of the lost!
- Truly, in such a case “’tis the survivor dies.”
-
- It is often said that misfortunes never come singly. So, indeed, did it
- prove in the case of this family. The property left by Mr. Hapley was
- barely sufficient to pay his debts; and as most of it was mortgaged,
- very little remained for the family. Notwithstanding these reverses,
- Jessie continued to attend the academy, and was still “trying to be
- somebody,” as Abby Leonard contemptuously expressed it, though that
- young lady, it should be added, now manifested something like pity for
- the heart-stricken girl. And in spite of the drawbacks to which she had
- been subjected, Jessie maintained a high rank in her class, winning the
- respect alike of teachers and scholars, as she also did their sympathy
- and good-will. But there were few among her gay-hearted school-mates
- who could half realize the sorrows, and disappointments, and
- discouragements, that were mingled in her cup.
-
- On returning from school one afternoon, she found traces of weeping on
- the face of her mother, which the latter for a time declined to
- explain. The reason, however, came out after a while. On the death of
- Mr. Hapley, as he left no will, an administrator was appointed,
- according to law, to settle up his estate; that is, to take charge of
- the property, ascertain and pay the debts, and deliver the balance, if
- any, to the lawful heirs. This administrator was a kind-hearted man
- named Allen, who had always shown himself very friendly to Mrs. Hapley.
- It seemed Mr. Allen had called upon her, that afternoon, to talk about
- her husband’s affairs. There was, he said, but little more than
- sufficient property to pay off the mortgages. He advised her,
- therefore, to give up the farm, to sell all the personal property they
- could dispense with, and to find homes for herself and children
- elsewhere. The children, he said, were all old enough to support
- themselves, and she need have no one but herself to look out for.
-
- “Well, mother, that’s only what I expected,” said Jessie, when the
- matter was explained; “we couldn’t carry on the farm, if we should stay
- here, and we may as well go somewhere else. Grandpa said he would give
- you a home; Henry can get a chance to live with some farmer, and work
- for his board and clothes; Sam can earn his living, if he chooses to;
- and as for me, I will go to some factory town and work in a mill, and
- in a little time I shall be able to support you, as well as myself.”
-
- “And give up your hope of becoming a teacher?” inquired her mother.
-
- “Perhaps not,” replied Jessie. “I may be able to fit myself for
- teaching, even in a mill. Girls _have_ done such things, and why not
- I?”
-
- “But I never can let you go off alone into a factory,” said Mrs.
- Hapley. “If you go, I must go, too.”
-
- “Well, mother,” added Jessie, after a pause, “we’ll manage to get along
- some how, only don’t let us get discouraged. We know it is all for the
- best, and every thing will come out right in the end. When I feel sad,
- I repeat to myself that beautiful hymn Mr. Merrill read at Benny’s
- funeral—do you remember it, mother?” and Jessie recited the following
- verses:—
-
- “O Father, good or evil send,
- As seemeth best to thee,
- And teach my stubborn soul to bend
- In love to thy decree.
-
- “Whatever come, if thou wilt bless
- The brightness and the gloom,
- And temper joy, and soothe distress,
- I fear no earthly doom.
-
- “Life cannot give a cureless sting,
- Death can but crown my bliss,
- And waft me far, on angel’s wing,
- To perfect happiness.”
-
- Jessie’s uncomplaining spirit, her readiness to sacrifice her most
- cherished hopes, and her beautiful, child-like faith in God, shed a
- sweet and soothing influence upon the fainting and murmuring heart of
- the mother. A little while after, Henry came in from school, and for a
- moment looked rather sad, when he was told that the family had got to
- remove and be broken up, very soon; but he quickly recovered his good
- spirits, saying:—
-
- “Well, mother, I don’t care much, after all. Let Mr. Todd have the old
- farm if he wants it—it’s all run out, and we couldn’t do anything if we
- staid here. I know I can earn my living, if anybody will give me a
- chance, and one of these days I’ll have a good deal better farm than
- this—you see if I don’t! Then you and Jessie shall come and live with
- me, and we’ll all be together again.”
-
- Henry soon found a chance to earn his living, for Mr. Allen agreed to
- take him into his family at once, and maintain him in return for his
- services. As to Jessie, everybody said it was too bad to send her off
- to a mill, and after some little consultation, Mrs. Page proposed a
- plan by which this might be avoided. Ellen Blake, who had lived with
- the Page family for some time, was about to return home, on account of
- the sickness of her mother. It was proposed to let Jessie occupy her
- place in the family, working for her board, until she should finish
- preparing herself for a teacher. She was to attend the academy two or
- three terms more, and when not engaged in her studies, was to render
- all the assistance to Mrs. Page she could. Her mother was to clothe
- her, during this period, and it was thought that after the present term
- she could render some assistance in the lower department, and thus
- secure her own tuition free. When this plan was proposed to Jessie, she
- seemed very grateful for the kindness which prompted so liberal an
- offer, but was unwilling to accept of it, fearing she could make no
- adequate return for her board. It was only after considerable
- persuasion that she consented to the arrangement. When the matter was
- finally settled, Mrs. Hapley concluded to accept an invitation to go to
- her father’s, in a neighboring town, and make that her home until she
- could do something for her own support.
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVIII.
-
- THE DIALOGUE.
-
-
- THE winter term of the academy was now drawing towards an end, and
- preparations were already commenced for the closing examination and
- exhibition. Thus far the term had been a very harmonious and prosperous
- one, and the students, with but few exceptions, had made good progress.
- There seemed, indeed, to be an unusual ambition and rivalry in some of
- the classes. One morning, the following line from Dr. Young was found,
- written in a large hand on the most conspicuous blackboard in the
- room:—
-
- “PRAISE NO MAN E’ER DESERVED, WHO SOUGHT NO MORE.”
-
- After the usual opening exercises, Mr. Upton called attention to it,
- saying it contained a truth which every scholar would do well to
- ponder. “If we aim at excellence as students,” he added, “merely to
- secure praise, and to gain a prize, or for the love of excelling, we
- are giving ourselves up to a very mean and unworthy motive. Whatever we
- may accomplish or win, under the influence of such a base impulse, we
- shall really deserve neither praise nor reward. Can any of you explain
- what is the true and proper motive for the student?”
-
- There was a pause. Finding no one was likely to respond, Jessie Hapley
- arose, and said:—
-
- “I suppose we ought to seek knowledge because it is good, in itself,
- and because it will increase our usefulness, hereafter.”
-
- “That is a very good answer,” replied Mr. Upton. “There may be other
- lawful motives for studying hard, such as a wish to please our parents
- and friends, or to better our condition in the world, or to gratify our
- own tastes; but the noblest and purest motive is that which Miss Hapley
- has given—knowledge is a good thing in itself, and is a mighty power
- for good, in the hands of one who aims to serve God and bless the
- world. Compared with such a motive as this, how contemptible is the
- ambition which seeks only to shine on examination day, or to outdo a
- rival, or take the highest prize! That we may bear this in mind, we
- will let this motto remain before us until the blackboard is needed for
- other purposes.”
-
- Ronald was a very good declaimer, as were several others of the boys in
- his class. Marcus had given him some encouragement that he would
- prepare an original dialogue for Ronald and a few of his classmates to
- bring out at the exhibition. This half-promise he was now reminded of,
- almost daily, until at length he agreed that if Ronald would find a
- suitable plot or subject for a dialogue, he would assist him in putting
- it upon paper. This, he said, was all he could promise to do, at
- present. Ronald was at first a little discouraged by this proposal; but
- setting his wits to work, in a day or two he suggested to Marcus a plan
- of a dialogue.
-
- “I should think we might make something out of that,” said Marcus,
- after Ronald had explained the plan. “Now you sit down, and write out a
- rough outline of it, and then let me see it.”
-
- “But you said you would help me write it out,” said Ronald.
-
- “So I will,” replied Marcus; “but I want you to do what you can, first,
- without my help. After you have made your first draft, we will go over
- it together, and see what improvements we can make in it.”
-
- “But I can’t do it—I don’t know where to begin,” pleaded Ronald.
-
- “O, yes, you can,” replied Marcus. “Write it out just as you explained
- it to me, and that will he a good beginning.”
-
- Ronald at length mustered courage enough to make the attempt. His
- dialogue was of course quite imperfect, but it served as a good basis
- for Marcus to work upon. Two or three evenings were spent over it, by
- the joint authors, before it was pronounced satisfactory. When
- completed, the ideas and incidents of the piece were for the most part
- Ronald’s, while they were indebted to Marcus for much of the language
- in which they were clothed, and for the general arrangement they
- assumed.
-
- The following is a copy of the dialogue, as it read when completed. The
- part which Ronald decided to take was that of “_Joseph Foot_,” as his
- powers of mimicry enabled him to imitate the backwoods dialect very
- successfully:
-
-
- HEAD AND FOOT.
-
- SCENE—_A school-room, with a class of ten or twelve boys,
- seated on a bench._ PRINCIPAL CHARACTERS—JOHN HEAD, _who is at
- the head of the class, and_ JOSEPH FOOT, _a wonderfully
- good-natured backwoods lad, who is at the other extremity_.
-
- HEAD [_rising, and holding in his hand something concealed in a
- cloth_.]—Friends and classmates! We have passed through the
- dread ordeal of another examination. Our grave and reverend
- seigniors have set in solemn inquisition over us, to their
- hearts’ content. They have weighed us, and gauged us, and
- tested us, and dissected and analyzed us, till we feel as if
- they had found out about all we know, besides some things that
- we don’t know. Our learned and venerable teacher, of whom we
- would ever speak with affection and esteem, has shown us in all
- our paces—trotting through our declamations and reading
- lessons, at a lively rate—tripping lightly among the big words
- in the dictionary—limping over verbs, and participles, and
- relatives, and copulatives—stumbling among cubes and roots, and
- the vulgarest of fractions—and floundering in a sea of
- forgotten geographical names and latitudes.
-
- BOY.—I say, Johnny, there’s one of your paces he didn’t put you
- through to-day—that’s the pace you exhibited when he flogged
- you round the school-room and out of the window, the other day.
-
- SEVERAL BOYS.—Order! order! order!
-
- HEAD.—I will only say to my tow-headed colleague from Misery
- Swamp, that if his insulting personalities were not entirely
- out of place on such an occasion as this, I would stop and
- settle with him on the spot [_shaking his fist_.]
-
- SEVERAL BOYS.—Order! order! order!
-
- ANOTHER BOY.—That’s right, Johnny—stand up for your honor! Form
- a ring, boys, and let ’em fight it out!
-
- BOYS.—Order! Shame! (_with hisses_.)
-
- HEAD.—Some of you called me to order—I should like to know why.
-
- A BOY.—It isn’t parliamentary to shake your fist at a fellow.
-
- HEAD.—I don’t care for that. We’ve nothing to do with
- parliamentary rules, here—we are governed by Congressional
- usage; and it’s Congressional to shake your fists, and use
- them, too, if you choose. Does anybody deny that?
-
- A BOY.—Enough said—go on with your speech, Johnny.
-
- HEAD.—Well, as I was saying, we have passed through the fiery
- trial of another examination, and the magnificent series of
- prizes—the total cost of which to our beloved teacher, as I
- learn from good authority, could not have been less than one
- dollar and twenty-five cents—have all been awarded. As is apt
- to be the case, I believe, on such occasions, some three or
- four scholars who are supposed to be brighter than their
- fellows, have carried away all the prizes, leaving absolutely
- nothing for the great body of the school. Now it has seemed to
- some of the more philanthropic members of the class that this
- is hardly fair; and to equalize in some degree this unjust
- scale of awards, it was suggested that we all unite and
- purchase an appropriate offering for the _poorest_ scholar in
- the class. Though it was my fortune, or misfortune, whichever
- you choose to regard it, to take the highest prize offered to
- this class, consisting of a touching account of a dear little
- girl who never was naughty, and died young—
-
- A BOY.—O my! Lend it to me, Johnny, wont you?
-
- SEVERAL BOYS.—And me, too! And me, too And me too!
-
- A BOY.—There, John Head! It’s too bad to make fun of your
- prize.
-
- HEAD.—I beg your pardon, I’m not making fun of it. But I wish
- folks wouldn’t interrupt me. You put me out so, that I don’t
- know as I can get through with my speech. As I was saying,
- although I took the prize myself, I go in for doing justice to
- all, and am happy to comply with the request, to present this
- testimonial of respect and affection to our esteemed friend who
- heads the other end of the class, as an Irishman might say.
- Brother Joseph Foot, will you please to rise? [_Foot rises,
- with a broad grin on his face._]
-
- A BOY.—Brother Foot is on his feet.
-
- HEAD.—My dear sir, you have been selected as the honorable
- recipient of a testimonial from your classmates, out of respect
- to the position you occupy, as the lowest round of our literary
- ladder. Your quick native intelligence probably will not demand
- that I should attempt to prove that there must be one round in
- the ladder lower than all the others; and I suppose it is
- equally evident to your enlightened mind, that if you
- constitute this round, yourself, the rest of us can be spared
- for other and higher posts of duty. We should, therefore, and I
- trust do, feel truly grateful to you for settling down so
- permanently and contentedly into this important and truly
- fundamental office, thus relieving us from all anxiety in
- regard to it. Your position may seem an humble one, but I may
- say for myself, that I have considerable respect for it. I like
- to see a person decidedly one thing or another. Let those eat
- luke-warm porridge who love it—I prefer mine either hot or
- cold. Moreover, the brighter scholars of the class are indebted
- to you not a little for their brilliancy, like the stars at
- night, which owe much of their beauty to the dark background.
- But the chief comfort and satisfaction of your life must be the
- thought that many of the greatest men the world has produced
- have been very dull and stupid boys. It is said that the bright
- boys of the school and the college are seldom heard from, when
- they become men. According to this rule, we may confidently
- hope to hear a tremendous report from yourself, one of these
- days.
-
- Accept, then, classmate, this slight token of good-will and
- esteem, from your friends. It is a heart tribute, whose
- expressiveness and significance will doubtless be appreciated
- by you. Accept it—and while you indulge the fond consciousness
- that you have attained to this distinction without resorting to
- selfish and unworthy means, you may also comfort yourself with
- the grateful assurance that you have escaped the sting of
- envy—that inevitable bane of the prize scholar.
-
- [_He uncovers the testimonial, which proves to be a cabbage,
- and stepping up to_ FOOT, _who stands grinning, proffers it to
- him_.]
-
- BOY.—Why don’t you take it, Jo?—it’s a big rose.
-
- ANOTHER BOY.—Yes, Jo, take it—he wont charge you anything for
- it.
-
- FOOT [_taking the cabbage_.] Wall, I guess it’s good to b’ile,
- any heow.
-
- HEAD.—But, my good friend, you do not propose to consign this
- token of esteem from your classmates to the dinner-pot, as
- though it were nothing but a common vegetable!
-
- FOOT [_surveying first the cabbage, and then_ JOHN’S _head_.]
- Wall, ’tis ’most too bad to b’ile it—sich a good likeness o’
- your top-piece. They say all flesh is grass, but I guess some
- folks’ heads don’t want much of bein’ cabbages, neow that’s a
- fact. [HEAD _walks back to his seat_.] Jest look, neow! it’s
- the very image of his head, behind, isn’t it, you?
-
- SEVERAL BOYS.—Good! Good! Ha, ha, ha!
-
- FOOT [_examining the cabbage_.] Wall, this ’ere’s a pooty good
- sort of a cabbage, any heow, and a feller hadn’t oughter make
- fun of it. But if’t belongs to the biggest fool in the class, I
- shall feel as if I was cheatin’ you, Johnny, if I keep it.
-
- HEAD.—O, no, Jo, don’t be too modest—there’s no doubt you have
- the best claim—the whole class voted it to you.
-
- FOOT.—Wall, s’posin’ I ken prove that you’re the feller that
- oughter had it?
-
- HEAD.—You can’t do that little thing, Johnny—if you can, I’ll
- eat the cabbage raw.
-
- FOOT.—I don’t take no stumps, but if yer want to bet, jest say
- so. I’ll bet this ’ere ‘token,’ as yer call it, ag’inst a
- quarter dollar, that you oughter have it.
-
- HEAD.—Agreed. [_Fumbles in his pockets for money._] Here’s the
- quarter.
-
- FOOT.—So ’tis! Wall, here’s the cabbage. Bill, you hold the
- stakes, will you? [_Bill takes them._]
-
- A BOY.—You’re sold, Johnny, as sure as a gun! He’s got it on to
- you!
-
- HEAD [_scratching his head a moment_.] Why, Jo is going to put
- down a quarter, too, isn’t he?
-
- FOOT.—No, he isn’t going to put down a quarter tew, nuther. I
- said I’d bet this ’ere cabbage ag’inst a quarter—didn’t I,
- boys?
-
- A BOY.—Yes, that is just what he said.
-
- HEAD.—O, I didn’t understand it so.
-
- FOOT.—O, wall, you ken back deown if you wanter—I knowed it
- would be jest so.
-
- HEAD.—But I shan’t back down, so go ahead and win the bet, if
- you can.
-
- FOOT.—Wont you, though? Seems to me I would, if I’s in such a
- fix.
-
- HEAD.—O yes, you want to back out yourself, don’t you?
-
- FOOT.—Wall, no, I’ve gone so far I wont back eout; but I’ll
- tell ye what, Johnny, I don’t want to git away your money, so
- I’ll give in han’somely. _The cabbage is yourn!_
-
- [_General laughter and clapping of hands in the class, with
- cries of_ Good! Capital! You’ve got to eat it raw, Johnny! &c.]
-
- FOOT.—There, now, I’ll leave it to all hands if Johnny hadn’t
- oughter have that ’ere cabbage?
-
- ALL.—Yes! yes! To be sure he had! All right! &c.
-
- FOOT.—Then I’ll take that ’ere quarter, Bill—I b’lieve I’ve won
- my bet!
-
- [_Renewed demonstrations of merriment through the class._]
-
- HEAD.—But stop, I thought you just backed out from the bet.
-
- FOOT.—Back eout? No such thing—I said I wouldn’t back out, any
- way. I only kinder made you think I’d give in beat, but I won
- the wager fairly, arter all, didn’t I, boys?
-
- SEVERAL BOYS.—Yes! yes! So he did. It’s all fair.
-
- FOOT.—Wall, Johnny, if I’ve won, I expect that ’ere cabbage
- b’longs to me, tew. But I don’t want to be hard on yer;
- besides, ’twixt you and I and the teown pump, I don’t ’prove of
- bettin’, for dad says it’s jest about as bad as gamblin’; so
- s’posin’ we jest swap even—I’ll keep the quarter, and you may
- have the cabbage, and eat it raw or b’iled, jest as you please.
- It’s a pooty good price for it, I expect, but what’s the use of
- a feller’s tradin’, if he can’t make something?
-
- HEAD.—Well, Jo, you shan’t say I’m such a fool that I don’t
- know when I’m fairly cornered. I’ll own up handsomely, that I
- went to gather wool, and came home shorn; so you may keep the
- quarter, and I’ll take the cabbage. Here, Bill, pass over the
- property. [_Bill obeys._] Boys, I’ll just say to you, that the
- next time you want to make a present to the foot of the class,
- you will have to get somebody else to be your orator. And to
- you, Jo, I will frankly confess that you have taught me a
- lesson I shall never forget. I have learned that a boy is not
- necessarily a fool, because he is at the foot of his class, and
- that excellent as book learning is, common sense and mother wit
- are sometimes more than a match for it.
-
- FOOT.—Thank ye, Johnny; you done that han’somely, that’s a
- fact. Neow, Jake, you jest run over to the bake-shop, and git
- as much gingerbread as this ’ere quarter will buy, and we’ll
- have a gineral treat all reound. [_Hands him the money._]
-
-
- [_Exit_ JAKE. _Curtain falls._]
-
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIX.
-
- CLOSE OF THE TERM.
-
-
- “WHAT is the matter, Oscar? you look quite sober,” said Mrs. Page, one
- afternoon, as Oscar came into the kitchen, on his return from school,
- and began to take off his boots.
-
- “I should like to know,” replied Oscar, “why I don’t get a letter from
- home. I’ve been to the post office every day for a fortnight, expecting
- one, and it hasn’t come yet.”
-
- “Why, it doesn’t seem a great while since you had a letter from your
- mother; how long is it?” inquired his aunt.
-
- “Let me see,” replied Oscar, reckoning the time in his head; “why, it
- was just six weeks last Saturday.”
-
- “That isn’t a very long time to wait for a letter, for a boy of your
- age, who has been away from home as much as you have,” replied Mrs.
- Page.
-
- “I know it,” replied Oscar; “but they agreed to write, some of them,
- every month; and besides, I believe I think more of letters from home
- than I used to.”
-
- “That is a good sign, if you do,” replied Mrs. Page; “only you must be
- sure and do your share of the correspondence.”
-
- “I have done my share,” continued Oscar. “I have written regularly
- every month, almost from the time I came here.”
-
- “Then I think you will hear from home soon,” replied Mrs. Page.
-
- “Sooner than he expects, perhaps,” said a voice from the sitting-room,
- the door of which, opening from the kitchen, stood ajar.
-
- “Why, mother! is that you?” cried Oscar, springing to the door; “and
- you, too, father! Why, who would have thought you were in here, hearing
- me scold about you!”
-
- It was even so. Oscar’s parents had arrived late in the afternoon,
- quite unexpectedly, to make a short visit, and his aunt, as he entered
- the room, conceived the idea of withholding the news from him for a few
- moments, to render his surprise the more complete. The warm greeting
- need not be described; but it may be well to add, that both his father
- and mother protested that they were not in the slightest degree
- displeased with the “scolding” they had overheard, and promised there
- should be no further occasion for it, if they could help it.
-
- The examination and exhibition of the academy took place, in a few
- days, and a part of the exercises were attended by Oscar’s parents. Two
- days were devoted to this business, and, as usual, they were arduous
- and anxious days to both teachers and students. The committee who
- conducted the examination, like the similar body mentioned in the
- dialogue, seemed bound to find out all that the students knew, and a
- good deal more. The scholars, however, stood their ground well, and
- when the examination was concluded, Mr. Merrill, the village clergyman,
- pronounced it one of the most satisfactory he had ever attended in that
- place. Then came the closing entertainment, or exhibition, in which
- speaking, reading compositions, singing, etc., were the order of the
- day. This, too, passed off quite successfully. The whole concluded with
- the award of prizes. Among the successful competitors were Jessie
- Hapley, who took one of the highest premiums, for superior scholarship
- and good conduct; Oscar, who received a handsome volume, for faithful
- endeavors; Harrison Clark, who was awarded a prize for general
- improvement; and Charles Wilder, who received a gift for several fine
- drawings exhibited by him.
-
- In the evening after the exhibition, all of the students and teachers
- of the academy assembled at the house of Mr. Upton, the preceptor, to
- make him a surprise visit. The affair was so well managed, that he knew
- nothing of the intentions of his pupils until they began to pour into
- his house. But cheerful fires were soon blazing on the hearths of the
- principal rooms, fresh lamps were lit, and a dozen or two of chairs
- were brought in from a neighbor’s, which were all the preparations
- deemed necessary for the occasion. The hours were enlivened with social
- intercourse, and games, and music, and mirth, in which all participated
- with the utmost freedom and good-will. No refreshments except apples
- were offered, one of the elder pupils having considerately informed Mr.
- Upton at the outset that “they had eaten their suppers once, and
- considered that sufficient, whether at home or abroad.”
-
- In the course of the evening, by some manœuvre which he did not clearly
- understand, Mr. Upton found himself suddenly surrounded by the whole
- body of his pupils, and immediately one of their number, a young lady,
- commenced addressing him in a set speech. She held in her hand an
- elegantly bound book, which, after a neat address, she handed to the
- preceptor. This book was entitled, “_The Highburg Academy Offering to
- their Beloved Friend and Preceptor, Robert Upton, A. M._” It contained
- the autograph signature of every scholar connected with the
- institution, to each of which was prefixed a verse or two of
- appropriate poetry, or a few prose sentences, original or selected,
- transcribed by the several writers. The volume also contained quite a
- number of drawings, water-color paintings, maps, etc., executed by the
- scholars.
-
- The origin of this unique volume was as follows: At the close of
- several of the previous terms, Mr. Upton had received gifts from his
- scholars, which were of considerable value in themselves. Fearing the
- practice of making such presents might entail too heavy a tax on some
- of the poorer scholars, or subject them to the unpleasant duty of
- declining to contribute their portion to the fund, he determined to
- discourage the custom in future. Accordingly a few weeks before the
- present term closed, he confidentially intimated his feelings to
- several of the older and more influential pupils, and requested them,
- in case a presentation should be proposed, to nip the enterprise in the
- bud. When, therefore, one and another began to speak of presenting a
- testimonial to the preceptor, they were apprized that such a proceeding
- would be contrary to his wishes. But this only set their wits to work,
- and in a little time a project was on foot, which, it was thought,
- would at once give suitable expression to the feelings of the scholars,
- and yet avoid the objection he had named to such gifts. A quantity of
- paper, of uniform size and quality, was distributed among the pupils,
- and each was requested to write something upon a sheet, and sign his
- name to it. Drawings and paintings on paper were also solicited, from
- all who received instructions in those branches, and such as were
- deemed worthy, were accepted for the collection. These materials were
- then collected and arranged, and sent to a book-binder in another town,
- who bound them together into a handsome volume, with gilt cover and
- edges. Thus, at a trifling expense, a novel, beautiful, and, to the
- teacher, a really valuable keepsake was procured.
-
- Mr. Upton was quite taken by surprise by the gift, and in his reply to
- the presentation address, said it was peculiarly acceptable and
- pleasing to him, because its cost to the donors had been chiefly an
- expenditure of time, care, ingenuity, and taste, rather than money. A
- gift procured at such a price, he said, was far more appropriate as an
- expression of esteem and affection, under the circumstances, than one
- purchased simply by money, no matter how costly. It was far more
- precious to him, too, as it contained something which would cause him
- to remember every one of them, as long as he lived.
-
- As soon as these ceremonies were concluded, one of the boys brought and
- laid upon the table a portable rosewood writing-desk, of plain but neat
- and substantial workmanship.
-
- “Mr. Page, will you please to step this way?” said Harrison Clark, who
- stood near the table.
-
- Marcus came forward, whereupon Harrison proceeded at once to address
- him, as follows:—
-
- “DEAR TEACHER:—It is my pleasing task to present to you this
- writing-desk, in behalf of the pupils of Highburg Academy, and
- to ask your acceptance of the same. The same considerations
- which governed us in the selection of a testimonial for our
- worthy preceptor, restrained us from procuring a more expensive
- one for yourself. It is a plain and simple article of utility
- that we offer you; but though its intrinsic worth be small, we
- trust it will possess some slight value in your eyes, as a
- memento of the affection, esteem and gratitude which we all
- entertain towards you. The ability and success with which you
- discharged the arduous duties of the preceptor for several
- weeks, during his illness, the fidelity with which you have
- labored through the term in your own sphere, the gentle and
- patient spirit with which you have borne the many short-comings
- and provocations of those of us who have been more immediately
- under your charge, and the firm yet always kind manner in which
- you have led us on in our studies, and restrained us in our
- errors, have made an impression on our hearts which time will
- not efface. Many of us hope for a continuance of this pleasant
- intercourse, in months to come; but those of our number who now
- meet you for the last time as your scholars, could not let this
- opportunity pass without a public expression of our gratitude
- and esteem. Accept, then, dear sir, this slight token of our
- affection and good will, and may the good Father of all grant
- you a long, a useful and a happy life!”
-
- To this Marcus responded:
-
- “MY YOUNG FRIENDS:—I came here to help you surprise your worthy
- preceptor, and had no idea that any such trick as this was in
- the programme. You have taken me by surprise, most completely.
- I rather feel as if you had got the advantage of me, too. You
- knew you couldn’t do this to the general, with impunity, and so
- you thought you would try it on his aid-de-camp. I shall look
- out for you, another time, you sly rogues! But I wont scold you
- very hard, this time. No, I will rather frankly confess that
- this is the proudest moment of my life. Young and inexperienced
- as I am, such a gift from my first scholars, accompanied by
- such kind and flattering words, may well make me proud. I
- accept it with gratitude, only wishing that my poor efforts
- were more worthy of such a reward. I am sure that no honors or
- gifts that may fall to my lot hereafter, can ever displace from
- my heart the memory of this token of esteem from the first
- pupils I have had the honor and pleasure to instruct. May
- Heaven reward you for your kindness, and bless you in all your
- ways!”
-
- The desk presented to Marcus was supplied with a variety of stationery,
- and was really a beautiful and appropriate gift. He learned, afterward,
- that Harrison, the once mischievous and troublesome scholar, had been
- foremost in procuring the testimonial. Marcus always wondered, however,
- how the matter could have been kept from him so completely, inasmuch as
- every one in the family but himself was let into the secret.
-
- Oscar’s parents were much pleased with the part he sustained in the
- examination and exhibition, and with the general improvement visible in
- his conduct, habits and character. They left for home, the next day,
- but not until they had expressed their warmest thanks for the interest
- manifested by Marcus and his mother and aunt in Oscar, and their
- gratification on beholding the improvement he had made under their
- care. After their departure, Oscar discovered an addition to the
- inscription in his prize book, written in the delicate hand of his
- mother. The inscription now read as follows, the first three lines
- being from the pen of Mr. Upton, and the other three by Mrs. Preston:
-
-
-
- Highburgh Academy, Feb. 18, 185-.
- ────────
- +AWARDED TO OSCAR PRESTON+,
-
- For Faithful Endeavors:
-
- +THE FOUNDATION OF ALL EXCELLENCE+,
-
- +AND THE PLEDGE OF+
-
- +FUTURE HONOR AND USEFULNESS.+
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- VALUABLE WORKS FOR THE YOUNG.
-
- ----------------------------
-
-YOUNG AMERICANS ABROAD; or, Vacation in Europe: the Results of a Tour
- through Great Britain, France, Holland, Belgium, Germany, and
- Switzerland. By JOHN OVERTON CHOULES, D. D., and his PUPILS. With
- Elegant Illustrations. 16mo, cloth, 75 cts.
-
- A highly entertaining work, embracing more real information, such as
- every one wishes to know about Europe, than any other book of travels
- ever published.
-
- Three intelligent lads, who knew how to use their eyes, accompanied
- their tutor on a European tour; and, from a carefully-kept journal,
- they wrote out, in a series of letters to a favorite companion in
- study, at home, their impressions of the most remarkable places _en
- route_. The pencillings are genuine and unaffected, and in all
- respects form an interesting and instructive record of
- travel.—_Sartain’s Magazine._
-
- One of the most instructive and delightful books of the age.—_Southern
- Lit. Gaz._
-
- Boys, here is a book that will suit you exactly. It is a series of
- letters from certain boys travelling in Europe to their classmates in
- this country. It will improve your knowledge and amuse you during long
- winter nights.—_Methodist Prot._
-
- It is worth much more than many a larger and more pretentious volume
- for giving a daguerreotype of things abroad.—_Congregationalist._
-
- A beautiful book for young people, unlike any thing we have ever
- seen.—_Ch. Ob._
-
- Most interesting book that can be put into the hands of the
- young.—_Olive Branch._
-
- The best book of foreign travel for youth to be found in the whole
- range of American literature.—_Buffalo Morning Express._
-
-
-THE ISLAND HOME; or, the Young Castaways. By CHRISTOPHER ROMAUNT, ESQ.
- With Elegant Illustrations. 75 cts.
-
- The best and prettiest book for boys that we have lately seen.—_Boston
- Post._
-
- A stirring and unique work. It will interest the _juvenile men_
- vastly.—_Olive Br._
-
- Delightful narrative of the adventures of six boys who put to sea in
- an open boat, and were drifted to a desert island, where they lived in
- the manner of Robinson Crusoe.—_N. Y. Com._
-
- A book of great interest, and one which will be a treat to any boy.
- _Harte Circle._
-
- The young will pore over its pages with almost enchanted
- interest.—_Transcript._
-
- A modern Robinson Crusoe story, without the dreary solitude of that
- famous hero. It will amuse and instruct the young in no ordinary
- degree.—_Southern Lit. Gazette._
-
- A story that bids fair to rival the far-famed Robinson Crusoe. We
- become as much interested in the fate of Max, Johnny, Arthur, and
- the rest of the goodly company, as in the Swiss Family
- Robinson.—_Sartain’s Magazine._
-
-
-THE AMERICAN STATESMAN; or, Illustrations of the Life and Character of
- DANIEL WEBSTER, for the Entertainment and Instruction of American
- Youth. By the REV. JOSEPH BANVARD, author of “Plymouth and the
- Pilgrims,” “Novelties of the New World,” “Romance of American
- History,” etc. With elegant Illustrations. 75c.
-
- ☞ A work of great interest, presenting a sketch of the most striking
- and important events which occurred in the history of the
- distinguished statesman, Daniel Webster, avoiding entirely all points
- of a _political_ character; holding up to view, for the admiration and
- emulation of American youth, only his commendable traits of character.
- It is just such a work as every American patriot would wish his
- children to read and reflect upon.
-
- VALUABLE WORKS FOR THE YOUNG.
-
- BY REV. HARVEY NEWCOMB.
-
-HOW TO BE A MAN; a Book for Boys, containing Useful Hints on the
- Formation of Character. Cloth, gilt, 50 cts.
-
-“My design in writing has been to contribute something towards forming
-the character of those who are to be our future electors, legislators,
-governors, judges, ministers, lawyers, and physicians,—after the best
-model. It is intended for boys—or, if you please, for _young_ gentlemen,
-in early youth.”—_Preface._
-
-“How to be a Man” is an inimitable little volume. We desire that it be
-widely circulated. It should be put into the hands of every youth in the
-land.—_Tenn. Bap._
-
-
-HOW TO BE A LADY; a Book for Girls, containing Useful Hints on the
-Formation of Character. Cloth, gilt, 50 cts.
-
-“Having daughters of his own, and having been many years employed in
-writing for the young, he hopes to offer some good advice, in an
-entertaining way, for girls or misses, between the ages of eight and
-fifteen. His object is, to assist them in forming their characters upon
-the best model; that they may become well-bred, intelligent, refined,
-and good; and then they will be real _ladies_, in the highest
-sense.”—_Preface._
-
-Parents will consult the interests of their daughters, for time and
-eternity, in making them acquainted with this attractive and most useful
-volume.—_N. Y. Evangelist._
-
- _The following Notices apply to both the above Volumes._
-
-It would be better for the next generation if every youth would “read,
-learn, and inwardly digest” the contents of these volumes.—_N. Y.
-Commercial._
-
-These volumes contain much matter which is truly valuable.—_Mer.
-Journal._
-
-They contain wise and important counsels and cautions, adapted to the
-young, and made entertaining by the interesting style and illustrations
-of the author. They are fine mirrors, in which are reflected the
-prominent lineaments of the _Christian young gentleman and young lady_.
-Elegant presents for the young.—_American Pulpit._
-
-Newcomb’s books are excellent. We are pleased to commend them.—_N. Y.
-Obs._
-
-They are books well calculated to do good.—_Phil. Ch. Chronicle._
-
-Common-sense, practical hints on the formation of character and habits,
-and are adapted to the improvement of youth.—_Mothers’ Journal._
-
-
-ANECDOTES FOR BOYS; Entertaining Anecdotes and Narratives, illustrative
- of Principles and Character. 18mo, gilt, 42 cts.
-
-ANECDOTES FOR GIRLS; Entertaining Anecdotes and Narratives, illustrative
- of Principles and Character. 18mo, gilt, 42 cts.
-
-Interesting and Instructive, without being fictitious. The anecdotes are
-many, short, and spirited, with a moral drawn from each, adapted to
-every age, condition, and duty of life. We commend them to families and
-schools.—_Albany Spectator._
-
-Works of great value, for a truth or principle is sooner instilled into
-the youthful heart by an anecdote, than in any other way. They are well
-selected.—_Ev’g Gaz._
-
-Nothing has a greater interest for a youthful mind than a well-told
-story, and no medium of conveying moral instructions so attractive or so
-successful. The influence is far more powerful when the child is assured
-that they are _true_. We cannot too strongly recommend them to
-parents.—_Western Continent, Baltimore._
-
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- ● Transcriber’s Notes:
- ○ Missing or obscured punctuation was silently corrected.
- ○ Typographical errors were silently corrected.
- ○ Inconsistent spelling and hyphenation were made consistent only
- when a predominant form was found in this book.
- ○ Text that:
- was in italics is enclosed by underscores (_italics_);
- was in bold by is enclosed by “equal” signs (=bold=)
- had extra character spacing by plus signs (+stretched+).
-
-
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARCUS ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.